Redes TIA Portal - Profinet - Apostila

Prévia do material em texto

siemens.com/sitrain
 
SITRAIN 
Digital Industry Academy
IK-TIAPN
Industrial Communications 
PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in TIA Portal
IK-TIAPN
Industrial Communications 
PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in TIA Portal
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN 
Training for Industry 
 
 
Industrial 
Communication 
PROFINET with Industrial 
Ethernet in TIA Portal 
 
Course IK-TIAPN 
1 Communication with SIMATIC 
2 Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
3 Basics of PROFINET 
4 Network Components 
5 PROFINET Configuration 
6 Topology Editor 
7 Diagnostics 
8 Web Services for PROFINET 
9 Ring Redundancy MRP 
10 Shared Device 
Name: 
 
 
Course from: to: 
 
 
Instructor: 
 
 
Location: 
 
 
 
This document was produced for training purposes. 
SIEMENS assumes no responsibility for its contents. 
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its 
contents is not permitted without express written authority. 
Offenders will be liable to damages. 
 
Copyright © Siemens AG 2018. All rights, including rights 
created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or 
design, are reserved. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN course offer on the internet:www.siemens.com/sitrain 
 
Version: V15.01.00 (for TIA Portal V15.1) 
 
11 I-Device 
12 
PROFINET IRT & Isochronous 
Mode & Oversampling 
 
13 Gateways 
14 
Communication Possibilities in 
TIA Portal 
 
15 S7 Communication 
16 Open User Communication – OUC 
17 OPC UA 
18 
Appendix: 
Diagnostics and Commissioning 
Tools 
 
19 Training and Support 
20 
 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-1 
 
Contents 1 
 
 
 
 
 
1. Communication in the SIMATIC World ................................................................. 1-2 
1.1. Communication in a Factory ................................................................................................. 1-3 
1.2. Subnets in SIMATIC ............................................................................................................. 1-4 
1.3. Industrial Ethernet ................................................................................................................. 1-6 
1.4. Industrial Wireless Communication....................................................................................... 1-7 
1.4.1. IWLAN – Industrial Wireless LAN ......................................................................................... 1-8 
1.4.2. IWLAN and WirelessHART ................................................................................................... 1-9 
1.4.3. Teleservice (Remote Diagnostics and Remote Maintenance) with SIMATIC 
Teleservice .......................................................................................................................... 1-10 
1.5. PROFINET IO ..................................................................................................................... 1-11 
1.6. IT Standards & Security ...................................................................................................... 1-12 
1.7. Actuator - Sensor Interface ................................................................................................. 1-13 
1.8. IO-Link ................................................................................................................................. 1-14 
1.9. Gateways ............................................................................................................................ 1-15 
1.10. Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 1-16 
1.10.1. PROFIBUS .......................................................................................................................... 1-17 
1.10.2. EIB, European Installation Bus (KNX) in Building Automation ........................................... 1-18 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1. Communication in the SIMATIC World 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... get an idea of communication in automation
... be familiar with the different communication media
... get an introduction to communication in the factory
... know what the four large subnets in SIMATIC are
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-3 
1.1. Communication in a Factory 
 
Management Level / Operations Level 
Higher-level tasks that concern the overall operation are handled at the management level 
(management functions). These tasks include the storage of process values as well as 
processing functions for optimization and analysis and their output in report form. The data 
required for this is collected and processed for the whole site. Other sites can also be accessed 
from the management level. The number of devices can exceed 1000. 
Control Level / Cell Level 
All automation and optimization tasks are handled autonomously at the cell level. Programmable 
controllers, PCs and devices for operator control and monitoring are connected to one another at 
the cell level. 
Field Level 
The field level is the link between the systems and the programmable controllers. The field 
devices measure, signal and forward the commands of the cell level to the systems. Small 
amounts of data are transmitted in most cases. Hierarchical communication is typical, that is, 
several field devices communicate with one master. 
Actuator-Sensor Level 
At this level, a master communicates with the actuators and sensors connected to its subnet. Fast 
response times for a few data bits are characteristic for this level. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 3 Siemens AG © 2016
Communication in a Factory
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.2. Subnets in SIMATIC 
 
Industrial Ethernet (IEEE 802.3) 
Industrial Ethernet, the international standard for area networking is currently the number one 
network in the LAN environment with a share of over 90%. Industrial Ethernet enables powerful 
communication networks to be set up over wide areas. On the basis of global wireless standards, 
e.g. IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n, GSM, GPRS or UMTS (3G), reliable wireless networks can be set up in 
the industrial environment. 
PROFINET (IEC 61158/61784) 
PROFINET, the international standard uses Industrial Ethernet and enables real-time 
communication down to the field level. With the full utilization of existing IT standards, PROFINET 
enables high-performance motion control applications, efficient cross-manufacturer engineering 
and high machine and plant availability on Industrial Ethernet. Due to its flexibility, PROFINET 
offers new options for system design, such as the use of any topology and fail-safe networks, 
even via wireless connections. 
PROFIBUS (IEC 61158/61784) 
PROFIBUS, the international standard for the field level is the global market leader among 
fieldbus systems. It is the only fieldbus to allow communication both in manufacturing applications 
and in process-oriented applications. 
AS-Interface (IEC62026/EN 50295) 
AS-Interface is the international standard which, as an economical alternative to the cable 
harness, links sensors and actuators by means of a two-wire cable. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 4 Siemens AG © 2016
Subnets in SIMATIC
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document,V15.01.00 1-5 
IO-Link 
IO-Link is the standard for intelligently connecting sensors, RFID systems and actuators from the 
field level to the control level. 
Gateways 
Gateways are realized using controllers or links. Configuration and diagnostics can be performed 
from any point in the system. 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.3. Industrial Ethernet 
 
Industrial Ethernet 
Industrial Ethernet is based on the IEEE 802.3 and IEEE 802.11 standards and enables 
connection of your automation system to your office networks. 
Industrial Ethernet provides information technology (IT) services with which you can access 
production data from the office environment and work with the data. 
Due to the uniform standard and the standardization of Industrial Ethernet, a smooth transition to 
the office environment is possible. This coupling occurs with the help of network components 
such as switches, routers or similar. 
Compared to the “normal” Ethernet, Industrial Ethernet is subjected to higher requirements. 
Industrial Ethernet components therefore also usually have a higher protection class or similar 
functionalities, for example. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 5 Siemens AG © 2016
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-7 
1.4. Industrial Wireless Communication 
 
Industrial Wireless Communication 
Within the scope of industrial communication, wireless communication opens up new prospects – 
from partial modernization of a plant to optimization of complex logistics or production processes. 
With Industrial Wireless Telecontrol, Industrial Wireless LAN and WirelessHART as a basis, 
Siemens offers solutions for reliable automation with Industrial Wireless Communication. 
Wireless solutions are increasingly becoming a matter of course in machines and plants. For 
stringent data communication requirements, Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) relies on 
innovations such as deterministic radio and the PROFINET Industrial Ethernet standard. Through 
the use of PROFIsafe via IWLAN, PROFINET opens up completely new prospects – from 
efficient engineering and real-time solutions to safety-related tasks. Furthermore, an IWLAN 
infrastructure can also be used for additional applications such as video monitoring. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 6 Siemens AG © 2016
Industrial Wireless Communication
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.4.1. IWLAN – Industrial Wireless LAN 
 
Industrial Wireless LAN 
Wireless solutions are increasingly becoming a matter of course in machines and plants. For 
stringent data communication requirements, Industrial Wireless LAN (IWLAN) relies on 
innovations such as deterministic radio and the PROFINET Industrial Ethernet standard. Through 
the use of PROFIsafe via IWLAN, PROFINET opens up completely new prospects – from 
efficient engineering and real-time solutions to safety-related tasks. Furthermore, an IWLAN 
infrastructure can also be used for additional applications such as video monitoring. 
In summary, extensions of the IEEE 802.11 standard are made available with Industrial Wireless 
LAN which address the requirements of industrial customers, in particular, with regard to 
deterministic and redundancy (iFeatures). This gives customers a single radio network for 
process-critical data (e.g. I/O communication, safety-related communication) and for non-critical 
communication (e.g. service and diagnostics). 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 7 Siemens AG © 2016
IWLAN – Industrial Wireless LAN
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-9 
1.4.2. IWLAN and WirelessHART 
 
WirelessHART 
WirelessHART is an open industry standard, developed for the particular requirements of wireless 
communication at the field level in the process industry. It meets all specific requirements for 
reliability, security, cost-effectiveness and user-friendly operation. WirelessHART opens up new 
communication options that were previously impracticable or impossible due to the operating 
environment or for economic reasons. 
SCALANCE W 
SCALANCE W provides IWLAN access points, client modules and an IWLAN controller for setup 
of the wireless infrastructure and connection of terminals in the industrial environment. The 
products provide the unique combination of reliability, robustness and security. SCALANCE W 
IWLAN components and the resulting possible PROFINET communication provides a wireless 
solution for applications down to the field level. 
The reliability of the radio channel is extended in a dust-free and water-tight design (IP65) of the 
robust enclosure meeting the stringent requirements for mechanical stability for which SIMATIC is 
known. Modern security mechanisms for user identification (authentication) and data encryption 
provide protection against unauthorized access and can be integrated in existing security policies 
without any problems. 
The RCoax cables provide a wear-free and reliable radio link, especially for conveyor systems, 
robots and rail-guided vehicles of any type. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 8 Siemens AG © 2016
IWLAN and WirelessHART
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.4.3. Teleservice (Remote Diagnostics and Remote Maintenance) with SIMATIC 
Teleservice 
 
Teleservice 
Remote diagnostics and remote maintenance of production plants have become indispensable in 
modern automation technology. They are more efficient and more cost-effective than on-site visits 
by a service employee. This allows malfunctions to be detected and corrected much faster. 
Downtimes of machines are reduced and their availability is increased. 
Machines and plants are increasingly operated in places that are far away from the place of 
manufacture. Plant manufacturers must nevertheless be able to guarantee services in case of 
malfunctions. During the warranty period, in particular, this can result in high costs. Teleservice 
helps to reduce this risk significantly. The possible applications for Teleservice are manifold. 
Plants can be diagnosed, values set and data transmitted from anywhere in the world via 
telephone lines. 
Teleservice also enables the sending of text messages per SMS or e-mail by SIMATIC 
controllers, thereby contributing significantly to savings in travel and personnel cost due to fewer 
service visits. In the case of remote Teleservice connections, a distinction is made between 
remote maintenance and remote connection. 
Remote Maintenance 
Remote maintenance permits access to a CPU with STEP 7 or an HMI device via WinCC. For 
remote maintenance, a technician dials into a remote system by telephone. STEP 7 can be used 
to read status information or to correct the user program remotely. 
Remote Connection 
Remote connection refers to a connection for data transmission. Remote connections are used to 
transmit data over the telephone network. Teleservice supports the program-controlled 
establishment of a connection between the PG or PC and automation system. Process data 
exchange between several automation systems can also be coordinated. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 9 Siemens AG © 2016
Teleservice (Remote Diagnostics
and Remote Maintenance) with SIMATIC Teleservice
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet inthe TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-11 
1.5. PROFINET IO 
 
PROFINET IO 
PROFINET enables the integration of distributed field devices (IO-Devices such as 
signal modules) directly in Industrial Ethernet. With the tried-and-tested configuration with STEP 
7, these field devices are assigned to a central controller (the so-called IO-Controller). Existing 
modules or devices can continue to be used with PROFINET-capable interfaces or links, which 
safeguards the existing investments of PROFIBUS and AS-Interface users. A configuration with 
standard and fail-safe modules in one station is also possible. An IO-Supervisor is used for HMI 
and diagnostics purposes by means of hierarchical diagnostic screens (Overview and Detailed 
diagnostic). User data is transferred via real-time communication. Configuration and diagnostic 
data is transferred using TCP/IP or IT standards. The easy tried-and-tested engineering approach 
for PROFIBUS has been adopted for PROFINET. From the viewpoint of programming with STEP 
7, it does not matter if an I/O device is being accessed via PROFIBUS or PROFINET. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 10 Siemens AG © 2016
PROFINET IO
IO-Device
PN/PN-Coupler
PROFINET IO 3
PROFINET IO 2
I-Device
PROFINET IO 1
IO-Controller IO-Controller
I-Device
IO-Controller
I-Device
IO-Device IO-Device I-Device
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.6. IT Standards & Security 
 
IT Standards & Security 
With Industrial Ethernet as its basis, PROFINET not only offers scalable real-time communication, 
but also standard TCP/IP communication according to IEEE 802.3 – with no compromises. This is 
the basis for integrated horizontal and vertical networking, whether wired or wireless. Accordingly, 
pioneering functions and established IT standards for network management, network diagnostics, 
web services, security and the connection of higher-level Gigabit networks are supported by 
PROFINET without any restrictions. 
Network Management 
Vis-à-vis fieldbuses, Ethernet in conjunction with TCP/IP and UDP/IP offers additional options for 
network management. The aspects of network infrastructure, IP management, network 
diagnostics and time synchronization are components of the integrated network management. It 
simplifies the administration and management of Ethernet – through the use of standard protocols 
from the IT world. 
Industrial Security 
As Ethernet networks have found their way down to the field level, this has enabled an integrated 
networking of all automation levels – as well as the direct connection to office networks and the 
Internet. However, this also means that production networks are exposed to the same risks as 
office networks – incorrect internal accesses and external attacks. Even a brief failure or minor 
malfunction can bring production to a standstill and cause massive damage. The automation 
technology therefore needs a security concept that reliably protects the production networks and 
automation components and is perfectly tailored to the particular requirements. Protection 
concepts are: 
• Access protection to automation cells (cell protection concept) 
• Protection against espionage and manipulation 
• Secure remote accesses via unsecure networks 
These security objectives can be achieved through the use of PROFINET security components 
such as SCALANCE S. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 11 Siemens AG © 2016
IT Standards & Security
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-13 
1.7. Actuator - Sensor Interface 
 
Actuator - Sensor Interface 
AS-Interface is an open, international standard based on EN 50295 and IEC 62026-2 for process 
and field communication. Worldwide, leading manufacturers of actuators and sensors support 
AS-Interface. The AS-Interface is a single master system. For automation systems from Siemens, 
there are communication processors (CPs) and gateways (Links) which act as master to control 
the process and field communication, as well as sensors and actuators which are addressed as 
AS-Interface slaves. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 12 Siemens AG © 2016
Actuator - Sensor Interface, ASI-Bus
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.8. IO-Link 
 
IO-LINK 
IO-Link is the smart concept for the standardized linking of switching devices and sensors to the 
control level by means of an economical point-to-point connection. 
The new IO-Link communication standard below the fieldbus level enables central error 
diagnostics and localization down to the actuator/sensor level and facilitates both commissioning 
and maintenance by allowing parameter data to be modified dynamically, direct from the 
application. 
The increasing intelligence of field devices and their integration in the overall automation enables 
data access down to the lowest field level. The result: higher system availability and reduced 
engineering effort. 
As an open interface, IO-Link can be integrated into all common fieldbus and automation 
systems. Consistent interoperability ensures maximum protection of investment. This also applies 
in the context of existing machine concepts for continued use of sensors that have no IO-Link 
interface. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 13 Siemens AG © 2016
IO-Link
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-15 
1.9. Gateways 
 
Gateways 
Gateways from one bus system to another are realized using links, controllers (PLCs) or PCs. In 
the case of PLCs or PCs, integrated interfaces and communication processors (CPs) can be 
used for this. Links forward the data autonomously from one network to the other. 
Links 
Some of the most common links are listed below: 
• IE/PB Link and IE/PB Link PN IO for the transition from Industrial Ethernet to 
PROFIBUS (also for fail-safe communication) 
• IE/AS-i LINK PN IO for the transition from Industrial Ethernet to AS-Interface 
• IWLAN/PB Link PN IO for the transition from IWLAN to PROFIBUS 
• PN/PN Coupler for the coupling of two PROFINET networks 
• PB DP/PB DP and PB DP/PB PA for coupling DP/DP and DP/PA networks 
• DP/AS-i LINK Advanced and DP/AS-Interface Link 20E for the transition 
from PROFIBUS to AS-Interface 
• DP/EIB Link for the transition from PROFIBUS to KNX/EIB 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Communication in the SIMATIC World Page 14 Siemens AG © 2016
Gateways
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.10. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to complete a topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 50 Siemens AG © 2016
Additional Information
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
Training Document, V15.01.00 1-17 
1.10.1. PROFIBUS 
 
PROFIBUS 
PROFIBUS is a bus system for process and field communication in cell networks with a small 
number of nodes, with field devices and for data communication compliant with IEC 61 158 / 
EN 50170. It is open for the connection of components of other manufacturers that conform to the 
standards: 
• PROFIBUS DP: for fast, cyclic data exchange with field devices 
• PROFIBUS PA: for applications in process automation and in the intrinsically-safearea 
• Data communication: PROFIBUS FDL and for data communication between 
 programmable controllers of different manufacturers 
PROFIBUS Medium 
The simple and cost-effective two-wire RS 485 transmission technology is exceptionally suitable 
for networks with a linear/tree structure and high data transmission rates. The total size of the 
network is smaller than with an optical network, but can also reach distances up to 1 km (at 12 
Mbit/s) or up to 10 km (at 187.5 Kbit/s) through segmentation and signal regeneration with up to 9 
repeaters. Instead of standard repeaters, it is also possible to use diagnostic repeaters, which not 
only handle the signal regeneration but also the online monitoring of the connected bus segment. 
A segment can have up to 32 nodes (master/slaves) and the entire network up to 126 nodes. The 
start and end of each segment must be fitted with an active cable termination that is either 
already integrated in the device (e.g. repeater) or is available as an active RS 485 terminating 
element. 
Note 
On the Service & Support pages it is possible to download the “SIMATIC PROFIBUS PROFIBUS 
with STEP 7 V13” manual. This can be found in the Publication number: 59193579. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Communication with SIMATIC
PROFIBUS
Entry ID: 59193579 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Communication in the SIMATIC World 
1-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
1.10.2. EIB, European Installation Bus (KNX) in Building Automation 
 
EIB / KNX 
The EIB (European Installation Bus) is now commonly used especially in Europe for building 
management systems. It is supported by many representatives of the electrical and building 
services automation sector who have come together under the auspices of the European 
Installation Bus Association (EIBA). A defined standard interface allows products from different 
vendors to be used in a common installation. 
One of the objectives of the EIB technology is to control all operational functions and processes in 
a building by means of a common bus cable. A twisted pair bus cable is looped through the 
building for the control. In addition to transmitting the control message frames, this bus cable also 
transmits the 24 V supply for the bus nodes. EIB is a distributed, event-driven serial bus system 
based on CSMA/CA. It is used to acquire, control, monitor and signal all operational functions in a 
building or large facility. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Communication with SIMATIC
EIB, European Installation Bus (KNX) in 
Building Automation
EIB-buttons
DP/EIB Link
Powerline
Bus coupler
Powerline
Coupler
Powerline 230 V
DriveWind sensor
EIB-binary-
input-modules
KNX
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-1 
 
Contents 2 
 
 
 
 
 
2. Basics of Industrial Ethernet ................................................................................. 2-3 
2.1. In the Beginning there was Ether .......................................................................................... 2-4 
2.2. The Historical Development of Industrial Ethernet ............................................................... 2-6 
2.3. Horizontal Levels of Industrial Automation ........................................................................... 2-8 
2.4. Why Ethernet in the Industrial Environment ......................................................................... 2-9 
2.5. Advantages of Ethernet in the Industrial Environment........................................................ 2-10 
2.6. Comparison Industrial Ethernet → Office Ethernet ......................................................... 2-11 
2.7. Industrial Ethernet Components ......................................................................................... 2-12 
2.8. ISO / OSI 7 – Layer Model .................................................................................................. 2-13 
2.8.1. Layer 1: Physical Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-15 
2.8.2. Layer 2: Data Link Layer ..................................................................................................... 2-16 
2.9. Ethernet in the OSI Model ................................................................................................... 2-18 
2.9.1. Ethernet Specification of the Physical Layer ...................................................................... 2-19 
2.9.2. The Ethernet Telegram in the Data Link Layer ................................................................... 2-20 
2.10. MAC Address ...................................................................................................................... 2-22 
2.11. IP Address V4 / Internet Protocol Address Version 4 ......................................................... 2-23 
2.12. Subnet Mask ....................................................................................................................... 2-24 
2.13. Network Address ................................................................................................................. 2-25 
2.13.1. Additional Network Address ................................................................................................ 2-26 
2.14. Addresses of a Network ...................................................................................................... 2-27 
2.15. Subnetting / Supernetting ................................................................................................... 2-28 
2.16. Calculation of IP Ranges - Classic...................................................................................... 2-29 
2.17. Calculation of IP Ranges - Alternative ................................................................................ 2-30 
2.18. Alternative Calculation of Device Addresses ...................................................................... 2-31 
2.19. PING / Packet Internet Groper ............................................................................................ 2-32 
2.20. Task Description: IP Addresses and Subnet Masks .......................................................... 2-33 
2.20.1. Exercise 1: Calculating with IP Addresses ......................................................................... 2-34 
2.20.2. Exercise 2: Subnetting ........................................................................................................ 2-35 
2.21. Access Procedure for Industrial Ethernet: CSMA/CD......................................................... 2-36 
2.22. Duplex Mode ....................................................................................................................... 2-37 
2.23. Types of Telegrams in Ethernet .......................................................................................... 2-38 
2.24. Ethernet HUB ...................................................................................................................... 2-39 
2.25. Shared LAN  → Switched LAN ........................................................................................ 2-40 
2.26. Ethernet SWITCH ............................................................................................................... 2-41 
2.27. Ethernet SWITCH Basics .................................................................................................... 2-42 
2.27.1. Ethernet SWITCH Basics 1 ................................................................................................. 2-42 
2.27.2. Ethernet SWITCH Basics 2 ................................................................................................. 2-43 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of IndustrialEthernet 
2-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.27.3. Ethernet SWITCH Basics 3 ................................................................................................. 2-44 
2.28. Switching Methods .............................................................................................................. 2-45 
2.28.1. Store and Forward .............................................................................................................. 2-45 
2.28.2. Cut Through ........................................................................................................................ 2-46 
2.28.3. Fragment Free .................................................................................................................... 2-47 
2.29. Switching Telegram Forwarding ......................................................................................... 2-48 
2.29.1. Prioritization through the PCP ............................................................................................. 2-48 
2.29.2. Processing Telegrams through Queues ............................................................................. 2-49 
2.30. Task Description: Setting the Field PG IP Address and Resetting Devices to Factory Settings2-50 
2.30.1. Exercise 3: Selecting the Field PG Ethernet Card ............................................................. 2-51 
2.30.2. Exercise 4: Opening the Adapter Settings .......................................................................... 2-52 
2.30.3. Exercise 5: Assigning the Field PG a Static IP Address ..................................................... 2-53 
2.30.4. Exercise 6: Networking the Devices ................................................................................... 2-54 
2.30.5. Exercise 7: Resetting the Devices to Factory Settings ....................................................... 2-55 
2.31. Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 2-57 
2.31.1. ISO / OSI 7 – Layer Model .................................................................................................. 2-58 
2.31.1.1. Layer 1: Physical Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-60 
2.31.1.2. Layer 2: Data Link Layer ..................................................................................................... 2-61 
2.31.1.3. Layer 3: Network Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-63 
2.31.1.4. Layer 4: Transport Layer ..................................................................................................... 2-64 
2.31.1.5. Layer 5: Session Layer ....................................................................................................... 2-65 
2.31.1.6. Layer 6: Presentation Layer ................................................................................................ 2-66 
2.31.1.7. Layer 7: Application Layer .................................................................................................. 2-67 
2.31.2. TRACERT / Trace Route .................................................................................................... 2-68 
2.31.3. IP Address V6 ..................................................................................................................... 2-69 
2.31.4. Special IP Area Ranges / IP Addresses ............................................................................. 2-70 
 
 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-3 
2. Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... be familiar with the history of Ethernet
... understand the difference between Ethernet and Industrial Ethernet
... basically understand Industrial Ethernet
... understand the structure of IP addresses and subnet masks
… be able to calculate with IP addresses and subnet masks
… understand the difference between Shared LAN and Switched LAN 
and be able to explain it
… know the function of a Switch and how it works
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.1. In the Beginning there was Ether 
 
Ethernet 
Digital communication is an integral part of today’s world. The basis on which this digital 
communication is even possible is, however, often forgotten: The Ethernet. 
The “birth” of Ethernet is depicted in the picture. The most important facts with regard to Ethernet 
are the following: 
• The first mention of Ethernet was in 1973 in a memo from Robert Metcalfe. 
• It was developed between 1973 and 1974. It was modeled on the former ALOHAnet. 
• In 1975, Xerox PARC filed the patent for the Ethernet. As the developers involved, the 
patent lists: Robert Metcalfe, Chuck Thacker, Butter Lampson and David Boggs. 
• Starting in 1980, the Ethernet was further developed as Ethernet-Version 1 by the IEEE in 
Working Group 802. 
• The standardization of this bus system occurs in 1983 through IEEE 802.3. 
• In 1985, SIEMENS launched the SINEC H1 bus system on the market - the Ethernet for 
the industrial application and the predecessor of today’s SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet. 
• International recognition was achieved in 1989 as the ISO/IEC/IEEE 8802-3 
Standard for Ethernet was published. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Grundlagen Industrial Ethernet Seite 3 Siemens AG © 2016
Am Anfang war der Ether
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-5 
Transmission Techniques 
Starting in 1981, IEEE pursued three different techniques: 
• CSMA/CD (802.3) 
Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection 
• Token Bus (802.4) 
• Token Ring (802.5) 
While the Token Bus procedure was supported by General Motors and the Token Ring procedure 
by IBM, the ECMA (European Computer Manufactures Association) supported the CSMA/CD 
procedure. 
In March 1982 their members agreed to support the procedure which was followed by the 
recognition of the CSMA/CD 802.3 Standard in December 1982. This Standard was then 
published in 1985. 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.2. The Historical Development of Industrial Ethernet 
 
SIEMENS Industrial Ethernet 
After extensive investigations and the supplementing of the standard by an integrated shielding 
and grounding concept, the suitability of Ethernet for industrial use was demonstrated. 
In this industrial design, the bus system has captured the industry since 1985 as SINEC H1, the 
predecessor of today’s SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet. The sceptics of the time, who deemed 
a non-deterministic access procedure such as the CSMA/CD used for Ethernet as inappropriate 
for industrial use, have been proven wrong by thousands of plants. 
Since then, Industrial Ethernet has been consistently further developed. To increase the system 
availability, the first redundant networks came into being at the end of the eighties through the 
development of a dual Ethernet bus system. 
With the advent of fiber optic cables, the shift of Ethernet as a bus system to a star-shaped 
network began at the end of the eighties. Terminals were no longer connected by a commonly 
used bus, rather, point-to-point via an active network component, the star coupler or hub. Greater 
distances between devices became possible. Potential equilization or lightning protection 
measures became redundant. This was the birth of the SINEC H1FO communicationsystem. 
Particularly in the terminal connection area, “Twisted Pair” established itself in the mid 1990s as 
the new transmission medium with which a higher connection density at lower connection costs 
was achieved. 
At the same time, the passive cabling technology for the transmission of data and voice were 
standardized in the European standard EN 50173 “Generic cabling systems, 1995” and in the 
international equivalent ISO/IEC 11801. Company networks were divided into primary area 
(network between buildings), secondary area (building backbone) and tertiary area (network on 
the floor). The tree-like network topology used primarily in the office area today emerged. 
The first SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Switches were introduced to the market at the end of 
the 1990s. The OSM (Optical Switch Module) and ESM (Electrical Switch Module) were 
specifically designed for use in the plant and terminal network of a process control system. They 
were the first representatives of a new product group, the Control Level Switches. 
 
Many properties of the Industrial Ethernet OLMs which were replaced almost completely by the 
new switches in today’s plants, can be found once again in the Control Level Switches: 
Optimized for use in compact control cabinets, DIN rail mounting, 0°C - 60°C ambient 
temperature, 24V DC supply. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 4 Siemens AG © 2016
The Historical Development of Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-7 
Added to this was a considerably simplified network planning with an extensive structure (up to 
50 switches can be cascaded), the increase of the transmission speed to 100 Mbit/s, a higher 
number of ports per network component, a long distance variant for single distance lengths up to 
26km with single-mode fiber optic cables as well as the remote diagnostics via the 
SNMPStandard. 
The systematic further development of FieldLevel Switches by SIMATIC NET brought the new 
device generation with the product lines SCALANCE X-100 (unmanaged switches) and 
SCALANCE X-200 (managed switches) onto the market in mid 2004. With a multitude of 
electrical and optical connections as well as devices with high IP65 degree of protection and for 
isochrones real-time, a suitable device variant is available here for every application. 
PROFINET, the open standard for automation, goes one step further: real-time and IT 
communication can be operated together on the same network. PROFINET is based on Industrial 
Ethernet and enables the device interfacing from the field level up into the process management 
level. In addition to the direct connection of distributed field devices, the intelligent terminals, to 
Industrial Ethernet, isochronous Motion Control applications can also be realized. 
 
 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.3. Horizontal Levels of Industrial Automation 
 
Process Management Level / Data Management Level 
The process management level, also called the data management level, is used to manage, to 
archive and to visualize data as well as data sets from the control and field levels. 
Control Level 
The control level is responsible for the control and regulating of the plant and the process. Here, 
the data from the field level comes together and is analyzed intrinsic to the plant section. 
Field Level / Production Level 
The task of the field level is to measure, position and switch the individual plant sections. Here, 
the sensor and actuator data is read-in and processed. 
Vertical Integration 
Through the use of Industrial Ethernet, standard mechanisms of communication and information 
technology such as OPC/XML along with standard protocols such as UDP/TCP/IP and HTTP can 
be used in automation. This makes a transparent access directly to the data of the automation 
systems in the control level and production level by the process management level of the 
company possible. 
The vertical integration of the individual horizontal levels is thereby extremely simplified! 
Note 
In a comprehensive integration, the company level is also integrated via the management level. It 
can then communicate with the management level via the office Ethernet and exchange data. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 5
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Horizontal Levels of Industrial Automation
Process Management 
Level 
Control Level
Field Level
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-9 
2.4. Why Ethernet in the Industrial Environment 
 
Communication in the Industrial Environment 
The demands on communication in the industrial environment are very different from those of 
conventional office communication. This applies to almost all aspects of communication, such as, 
active and passive network components, connected terminals, network concepts / network 
topologies, availability, data volumes, ambient conditions, only to mention a few. 
Likewise, there are network protocols specially optimized for industrial communication, even 
though back then TCP/IP, a classic protocol in office communication, had entered into the 
production and process control. 
Industrial Ethernet – Designed for Industry 
The basic idea of Industrial Ethernet is to use the existing standard (Ethernet network standard 
IEE 802.3) and to supplement it by the necessary and useful details for industrial communication. 
This results in products for the specific circumstances in the production and process control 
environment. 
Note 
Unlike Ethernet, Industrial Ethernet is not a standard! That is why when different manufacturers 
talk about Industrial Ethernet they may have different understandings of the specifications. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 6 Siemens AG © 2016
Why Ethernet in the Industrial Environment
◼ Ethernet is the leader in office networks
◼ PROFINET is the innovation of PROFIBUS 
on the basis of Ethernet
◼ The Ethernet technology provides very high 
innovative strength, such as, switching
technology, wireless communication, Gigabit, 
Security,..
◼ Ethernet offers a variety of transmission media
(copper, fiber-optic, wireless communication) 
as well as flexible network structures (star, ring
and line topologies)
◼ A large number of suppliers / manufacturers,
also for the industrial market
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.5. Advantages of Ethernet in the Industrial Environment 
 
Advantages of Industrial Ethernet over other Fieldbuses 
• Plant data and IT data can be transmitted almost simultaneously via one common 
medium. 
• A large address area with an almost unlimited number of devices (subscribers) is 
available. 
• Through a cascading of switches, large network expansions and a mixture of different 
network structures can easily be realized. 
• Larger amounts of data can be transmitted quickly and efficiently because of the 
transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s. 
• Future-proof due to Gigabit Ethernet. 
• Equal bus access for all network participants is possible. 
• Different transmission media (cable, wireless, fiber optic,…) can be combined. 
• Simple integration of Internet technologies and protocols. 
• The development of Industrial Ethernet profits from developments in the “office Ethernet” 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 7 Siemens AG © 2016
Advantages of Ethernet in the Industrial 
Environment
Uniform network structure
◼ Fewer interfaces
◼ Plant-wide processing
◼ Easy to use
The advantages of Internet technologycan be used in production.
◼ Web services
◼ Remote access / maintenance
◼ Software updates
Further development of current systems
◼ Increasing performance
◼ Larger data volumes
◼ System integration down to the field level
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-11 
2.6. Comparison Industrial Ethernet → Office Ethernet 
 
Industrial Ethernet 
The same Ethernet Standard is used both in industry and in the office. The requirements 
concerning the network products used, however, differ considerably! 
In everyday industrial use, networks must work reliably under extreme conditions, such as, 
electromagnetic interference, high operating temperatures and mechanical stresses. 
Network Products 
In order to meet the high demands of industry, there are special Industrial Ethernet network 
products. Many suppliers offer both passive as well as active network components which meet 
the particular requirements of an industrial environment. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 8 Siemens AG © 2016
Comparison Industrial Ethernet → Office Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet Office Ethernet
Installation ▪System-dependent cabling and cable 
bushing
▪Field assembly connectors up to IP67
▪Redundant cabling, frequently ring 
structures
▪Fixed base installations in the building
▪Variable device connection to standard 
work areas
▪Predominantly star-shaped cabling
Data ▪Small data packets
▪Very high network availability
▪Mainly cyclic transmission
▪Real-time performance necessary
▪Large data packets 
▪Medium network availability
▪Mainly acyclic transmission
▪No real-time performance necessary
Environment ▪Expanded temperature range
▪Dust, moisture and vibration possible
▪Danger due to mechanical damage or 
chemical load
▪High EMC load 
▪Normal temperature range 
▪Little dust, moisture and vibration
▪Very little mechanical or chemical load
▪Low EMC load 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.7. Industrial Ethernet Components 
 
Industrial Ethernet Components 
In the industrial environment, both the active as well as the passive components must withstand 
much harsher ambient conditions than in the office world. This becomes perceptible in many 
ways! 
Industrial Ethernet components, active as well as passive, have a higher protection class, a more 
rugged design, and, have integrated diagnostic LEDs, just to mention a few examples. 
Note 
The use of office Ethernet network products in the industrial environment is not recommended! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 9
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet Components
Easy exchange
Easy diagnostics (LEDs)
Easy exchange
Set – / Reset – button
Redundant power supply
Increased degree of 
protection
Signal contact
Rugged design
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-13 
2.8. ISO / OSI 7 – Layer Model 
 
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) – Model 
The OSI – 7 Layer Model is a reference model for manufacturer-independent communication 
systems, that is, a design basis for communication protocols and computer networks. 
OSI stands for Open Systems Interconnection and was designed and standardized by ISO as the 
basis for communication standards. The OSI layer model or OSI reference model is based on the 
DoD layer model on which the Internet is based. In comparison to the DoD layer model, the OSI 
layer model is more finely subdivided. 
DoD layer model (Department of Defense): 
 
 
The OSI model serves as a tool for describing the principle function of a network. It is divided into 
seven sub-areas which are also referred to a layers. Each layer, with the exception of the 
uppermost layers, makes its function available to the layers above it. The most important layers 
for Ethernet are Layer 1 and Layer 2. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 10
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
ISO / OSI 7 – Layer Model
Layers 
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
Anwendungs-
orientiert
Transport-
orientiert
Transport-
orientiert
Transport-
orientiert
transport-oriented
Anwendungs-
orientiert
application-
oriented
7. Application Layer
6. Presentation Layer
5. Session Layer
4. Transport Layer
3. Network Layer 
2. Data Link Layer
1. Physical Layer
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
For each layer, functions and protocols are defined which must fulfill specific tasks for the 
communication between two systems. For communication between two systems, the 
communication or the data flow passes through all 7 layers of the OSI layer model twice - once at 
the Sender and once at the Recipient. Depending on how many ‘stops’ the communication route 
has, the communication also passes through the layer model several times. 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-15 
2.8.1. Layer 1: Physical Layer 
 
Physical Layer 
In the physical layer, the electrical, optical and mechanical connection to the transmission 
medium used is defined. It is responsible for the proper transmission of individual bits through the 
physical channel. This is essentially a matter of the coding of signals, the defining of the 
transmission medium and the transmission devices. 
Each medium has its own section. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 11 Siemens AG © 2016
Layer 1: Physical Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
1. Physical Layer:
Measures and procedures for transmitting bit sequences
▪ Devices and network components are assigned to the 
Physical Layer
▪ Defines the optical, electrical and mechanical connection 
to the transmission medium
▪ Manages the coding of the individual bits or the bit 
sequences
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.8.2. Layer 2: Data Link Layer 
 
Data Link Layer 
In the data link layer, the transmission and the grouping of the individual bits in the transferable 
unit as well as the access procedure to the network is defined. It provides a reliable connection 
between terminal and transmission medium and ensures an error-free transmission. 
For this, the bit data flow is divided into (data) blocks, also called frames, and checksums are 
added. With this checksum, flawed blocks can be detected by the recipient and subsequently be 
rejected or even be corrected. 
According to IEEE, the Data Link Layer is divided into two sublayers - the Logical Link Control 
and the Media Access Control. Due to the Media Access Control, the data link layer is sometimes 
also called the MAC Layer. 
Media Access Control 
The Media Access Control layer is the lower of the two layers in the data link layer. It controls the 
access to the transmission medium. It defines which protocol is to be used. There are two 
different types of access, a controlled access and a competing access. 
Controlled access: 
• Token Ring 
• Token Bus 
• CSMA/CR 
Competing access: 
• ALOHA 
• CSMA/CD 
• CSMA/CA 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 12 Siemens AG © 2016
Layer 2: Data Link Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
2. Data Link Layer:
Logical connections to data packets and elementary error 
detectionmechanisms
▪ Consists of two sublayers, the Logical Link Control layer 
as well as the Media Access Control layer
▪ Divides the bit data flow into blocks or frames and adds a 
checksum
▪ Ensures a reliable and error-free transmission on the 
transmission medium
Logical Link Control
Media Access Control
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-17 
Logical Link Control 
The Logical Link Control layer is the upper of the two layers in the data link layer. It adds several 
identifiers to the data packet which are structured as follows: 
• DSAP (Destination Service Access Point) of 8 bytes 
• SSAP (Source Service Access Point) of 8 bytes 
• Control of 8 or 16 bytes 
Note 
A renewed request of rejected blocks is not regulated or provided in the data link layer! 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.9. Ethernet in the OSI Model 
 
Ethernet in the OSI – Layer Model 
Referring to the OSI model, the Ethernet Standard describes Layer 1 as well as Layer 2. To be 
more exact, the Ethernet Standard describes Layer 1 and Layer 2a since the Data Link layer is 
divided into two sublayers of which only the Media Access Control layer belongs to the Ethernet 
Standard. 
The Ethernet Standard therefore summarizes both mechanisms and media of the Physical Layer 
as well as the access to these in the Media Access Control in the Data Link Layer. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 13
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Ethernet in the OSI Model
Layers
Logical Link Control
Network
Transport
Application
Presentation
Session
2b
3
4
5
6
7
Ethernet based on 
Layer 1 + Layer 2a
Physical
2a
1
Media Access Control
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-19 
2.9.1. Ethernet Specification of the Physical Layer 
 
Definition of the Medium 
In the Physical Layer level, the different transmission media and the resulting data (en)coding are 
described in Ethernet. Each medium has its own section in the Standard. 
Notation of the Sections of the IEEE 802.3 for the Physical Layer 
The notation of the sections can be divided into three parts: 
• The transmission rate 
• The transmission procedure 
• The medium used 
100BASE-TX, for example, means that you are working with a transmission rate of 100 Mbit/s 
(100) with the baseband transmission (BASE) and a Twisted Pair Medium (TX). 
These notations are not always 100% consistent but the transmission rate is always 
recognizable. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 14
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Ethernet Specification of the Physical Layer
100Base-TX
Transmission rate
Transmission procedure
Transmission medium
Typische 
Standards
Teilbereich Übertragungsrate Medium
▪10Base5 ▪10 Mbit/s ▪Coaxial cable
▪10Base-T ▪10 Mbit/s ▪Twisted Pair cable (TP)
▪100Base-TX ▪100 Mbit/s ▪Twisted Pair cable (TP)
▪100Base-SX ▪100 Mbit/s ▪Fiber optics (short wave)
▪1000Base-T ▪1000 Mbit/s ▪Twisted Pair cable (TP)
▪1000Base-LX ▪1000 Mbit/s ▪Fiber optics (long wave)
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-20 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.9.2. The Ethernet Telegram in the Data Link Layer 
 
Definition of the Access Procedure 
The functional description of the Physical Layer is not enough to be able to targetedly transmit 
data. Only with the definitions on the MAC level of the Data Link Layer does it become possible to 
transmit data and the targeted sending of data within a network. The Ethernet Standard describes 
the access procedure with collision detection and how to proceed after a collision occurs on the 
MAC-Layer level. 
Definition of the Frame Format and the Addressing 
Beyond that, the Frame Format, that is the telegram structure of an Ethernet telegram, and the 
addressing scheme are described. This is necessary to guarantee uniform data processing. 
The Ethernet Telegram 
The Ethernet telegram is standardized according to IEEE802.3 and is therefore subject to a fixed 
structure: 
• Preamble: 
The preamble consists of a 7 byte long alternating bit sequence: “101010…1010”, also 
called a 10s-series. This is followed by the 1 byte long SFD - the Start Frame Delimiter, 
with the bit sequence: “10101011”. 
In the past, these 8 bytes were used for the bit synchronization of the different network 
devices. With today’s network components and the contemporary network topologies, 
this synchronization process is actually no longer necessary and is now only found in the 
specification for compatibility reasons. 
• Destination Address / Destination – MAC – Address: 
The MAC address of the network station which is to receive the data is stored in the 6 
bytes of the Destination Address. 
• Source Address / Source – MAC – Address: 
The MAC address of the network station, which has sent the data to the destination 
address is found in the 6 bytes of the Source Address. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 15
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
The Ethernet Telegram in the Data Link Layer
Not part of the 
Ethernet telegram
Ethernet Telegram according to IEEE802.3 (64 bytes to 1518 bytes)
with VLAN Tag maximum 1522 bytes
Preamble SFD Destination 
Address
Source 
Address
VLAN 
Tag
Type Data FCS
7 Bytes 1 Byte 6 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes 2 Bytes 46 Bytes – 1500 
Bytes
4 Bytes
Layer 2 describes the access to Layer 1 as well as the telegram structure
VLAN Tag is optional
TPID TCI
2 Bytes 2 Bytes
8100 PCP CFI VID
PROFINET uses PCP 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-21 
• VLAN Tag: 
In the Tagged-MAC-Frame according to IEEE 802.1Q there follows an additional 4 bytes 
as VLAN-Tag. The first 2 bytes contain the “Tag Protocol Identifier”, short TPID. This 
normally contains the constant 0x8100 (=802.1qTagType) which identifies a Tagged-
MAC-Frame as such. The following 2 bytes contain the “Tag Control Information”, also 
called TCI. It contains the “Priority Code Point”, PCP, the bit for “Canonical Format 
Indicator”, CFI, as well as the “VLAN Identifier”, VID. The VLAN-Tag is also used in 
PROFINET with the help of the PCP to prioritize the RT packets. 
• Type / Type Field (EtherType): 
The Type Field describes which type of packets are transported with this telegram. This 
can be, for example, the Internet Protocol (IP). The identifier would then be 0x8000 
(IPv4). 
In earlier versions, the length of the packet was found here instead of the Type. 
• Data / User data: 
The user data of the telegram is found here. It can have a maximum length of 1500 
bytes. If the user data is less than 46 bytes, a so-called PAD Field (also called “Padding 
Bytes”) is inserted in order to achieve the minimum size of an Ethernet Frame of 64 
bytes. 
The minimum size of 64 bytes for an Ethernet Frame is important in order to be able to 
reliably detect the collision of Ethernet packets! 
• Frame Check Sequence (FCS) / Test mark: 
The Frame Check Sequence (FCS) is a 4 byte long sequence which is calculated from 
the previous contents of the packet. It uses the Destination Address, the Source Address, 
the Type and the Data to calculate its 4 bytes. It is used by the recipient to verify the 
validity of the telegram. If the telegram is changed through errors on the line, it can be 
detected with the FCS. 
Note 
There are circumstances in which the Ethernet Frame can be larger than the maximum byte size 
of 1518 bytes. With the use of VLANs, for example, this is the case. A check must be made here 
to see whether all network components can even process such an oversizedEthernet Frame 
since it will otherwise be rejected! 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-22 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.10. MAC Address 
 
MAC Address 
The MAC address is the address of the physical interface of an Ethernet device. It is six bytes 
long, is as a rule presented in hexadecimal format and must be unique in the network. Originally, 
the address had to be unique worldwide and permanently burnt onto the device. Nowadays, 
many devices have adjustable addresses. 
The address is divided into an Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) which stands for the 
manufacturer of the device and a device address given by the manufacturer. Due to their many 
products, most manufacturers now have several OUIs. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
MAC Address 
MAC address of a 
SCALANCE XC208
00-1B-1B FE-B4-BC
Manufacturer ID Device address
Each manufacturer has 
an ID
Each device has a 
unique address
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-23 
2.11. IP Address V4 / Internet Protocol Address Version 4 
 
IP Address V4 
The IP address in Version 4 is 32 bits wide and uniquely identifies an IP device, also called IP 
node, in a network. This address is not, like the MAC address in Ethernet, permanently assigned 
to a device but can be freely configured. 
To make things easier, when we talk about an IP address after this, it is always assumed that this 
is of the type Version 4. If it should be of the type Version 6, it will say so explicitly! 
The IP address is represented in four blocks with 8 bits each which are separated by a dot. Even 
if this address is calculated in binary format, it is noted in decimal notation for reasons of 
readability. 
Each block can assume a value of 0 to 255. 
Localhost 
There is a special IP address, the so-called “Localhost” address. Your own computer can always 
be addressed with this address regardless of which IP address the network card currently has. 
The localhost address is composed as follows: 127.0.0.1 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
IP Address V4 / 
Internet Protocol Address Version 4
1100_0000 1010_1000 0000_0000 0000_0010
192 168 0 2
192.168.0.2
Decimal format
Standard format
An IP address is represented as 4 blocks à 8 bits, separated by a dot
127.0.0.1
Localhost address
Binary format
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-24 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.12. Subnet Mask 
 
Subnet Mask 
The subnet mask is, like the IP address, a 32 bit wide number. Together with the IP address, it 
defines the size of a network. By means of the subnet mask, an end device can check whether a 
communication partner is located in the same network or in another network. 
The subnet mask read in binary format consists of an uninterrupted sequence of ones. The 
subnet mask is noted either like an IP address in four blocks of 8 bits each or as a number of 
leading ones. 
The latter representation is always added to an IP address with a “/”. The IP address 
192.168.0.100 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 can therefore also be written as 
192.168.0.100/24. 
Note 
The familiar concept of network classes is outdated and was revised. It was replaced in 1993 with 
the Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR). 
In the picture, the network classes in alternative representation are only displayed since these are 
required for the simplified calculation of IP ranges. 
A subnet mask which only consists of ones, that is 32 ones, is not allowed. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 18
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Subnet Mask
1111_1111 1111_1111 1111_1111 0000_0000
255 255 255 0
/24
Binary format
Decimal format
Alternative 
representation
A subnet mask in binary format always consists of an uninterrupted sequence of ones!
Invalid subnet mask
1111_1111 1111_1111 1111_1111 0000_0100
255 255 255 4
/8 /16 /24 /32
Network classes
(outdated)
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-25 
2.13. Network Address 
 
ANDing Addresses 
In order to place an IP device correctly in a network, an associated subnet mask must always be 
configured in addition to an IP address. The IP address and the required subnet mask together 
form the network address. 
In order to determine the network address of an IP address and so also to check whether two IP 
addresses are located in the same network, the IP address is “ANDed” binary and bit-by-bit with 
the subnet mask. 
This means that each bit of the IP address is linked with the relevant bit of the subnet mask with a 
logical “AND”. 1 & 1 becomes 1, 0 & 1 as well as 1 & 0 to 0. 
Network Address 
The result of the operation described above is the address of the network in which the IP address 
is located, in other words, the network address. 
With the help of this network address, the user can find out whether two IP addresses (two 
devices) are located in the same network and can therefore exchange data without a router. This 
is the case when both IP addresses have the same network address. If the network addresses 
are not the same, data can only be exchanged between the devices with the help of a router. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 19
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Network Address
255 255 255 0
192 168 0 100
&
=
192 168 0 0
1100_0000 1010_1000 0000_0000 0110_0100
1111_1111 1111_1111 1111_1111 0000_0000
&
=
1100_0000 1010_1000 0000_0000 0000_0000
ANDing the 
addresses
ANDing the 
addresses
IP address and subnet mask in binary notation
Network address 
decimal
Network address 
binary
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-26 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.13.1. Additional Network Address 
 
Network Mask 
The subnet mask can also be seen as the network mask. This means that the subnet mask also 
determines the maximum number of devices which can be located in a network. 
In a network with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0, there can be 254 valid devices. In a network 
with the subnet mask 255.255.254.0, there can be 510 valid devices. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 20
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Additional Network Address
255 255 252 0
192 168 3 100
&
=
192 168 0 0
192 168 9 100
255 255 252 0
&
=
192 168 8 0
ANDing the 
addresses
ANDing the 
addresses
Same network 
address as before
Different network 
address
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-27 
2.14. Addresses of a Network 
 
Network 
Each network has special network addresses. These are the network address as well as the 
broadcast address. These two special addresses cannot be used as device addresses in this 
network! 
Network Mask 
The network mask defines the size and thus the maximum number of devices of a network. The 
maximum number of devices is always two less than the maximum number of addresses in a 
network. Each network always has at least two valid device addresses! 
Network Address 
The network address is always the first address in a network. Through this address, it can be 
checked whether two devices are located in the same network. As a result, the network address 
cannot be used as a device address! 
Broadcast Address 
The broadcast address is always the highest address in a network, but just like the network 
address, it cannot be used as a device address! All devices of a network can be addressed viathe broadcast address. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 21
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Addresses of a Network
255 255 255 0192 168 0 100
IP address Subnet mask
Network address192 168 0 0
192 168 0 1-254
256 – 2 valid device 
addresses
192 168 0 255 Broadcast address
255 255 252 0192 168 9 100
IP address Subnet mask
Network address192 168 8 0
192 168 8 1
192 168 11 255 Broadcast address
192 16811 254
4 x 256 – 2 = 1022
valid device addresses 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-28 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.15. Subnetting / Supernetting 
 
Subnetting 
Subnetting is when you divide a network into two or more smaller ones. The smaller a network is 
the more stable it runs. Depending on how many devices take part in a network, the subnet mask 
must be adjusted. 
An expansion of the subnet mask by a One (1) means a halving of the network. Two subnets are 
formed. Each additional One halves the networks in turn. 
Supernetting 
If you remove a One from the subnet mask, this is supernetting. The networks are then twice as 
large as before. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 22
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Subnetting / Supernetting
255 255 255 192
Subnet mask
Network address
64 – 2 valid device addresses
Broadcast address
172 100 5
0
1-62
63
172 100 5
64
65-126
127
172 100 5
128
129-190
191
172 100 5
192
193-254
255
Network address
64 – 2 valid device addresses
Broadcast address
Network address
64 – 2 valid device addresses
Broadcast address
Network address
64 – 2 valid device addresses
Broadcast address
172 100 5 200
IP address
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-29 
2.16. Calculation of IP Ranges - Classic 
 
IP Ranges 
Since there is only a limited space for IP addresses in the IP address space and thus also for 
devices in a network, the existing address space must be optimally utilized. This is done with the 
help of subnetting and IP ranges. 
Before you insert devices in a network you should decide what is the maximum number of 
devices which should be possible in the same subnet and which IP range must be reserved for 
the devices. 
Classic Calculation 
So that the calculation of how many devices are possible in an IP range can be done quickly, 
easily and efficiently, the method above can be used. 
The octet of the subnet mask which is not completely filled with 1s is looked at. Thinking 
decimally, this is the octet which is smaller than 255. This octet is taken and its numerical value is 
subtracted from the maximum number of network addresses 256. The result of this calculation is 
the bandwidth of the individual IP ranges which can be found in a network mask with this subnet 
mask. The counting of the IP ranges always starts with the first network address which is found at 
Address 0. If, for example, a bandwidth of 4 resulted from the calculation, the IP ranges would 
start at the addresses 0,4,8,12,16,20,24, etc. 
The number of devices is then calculated by multiplying the maximum number of devices in a 
network times the bandwidth and then subtracting two devices which are occupied by the network 
address and the broadcast address. Thus, in the example above, 4x256 -2 results in a maximum 
of 1022 devices per IP range. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 23
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Calculation of IP Ranges - Classic
255 255 252 0
192 168 9 100 IP address
Subnet mask
256
192 168 0 0 First IP range
252-
= 4
Max. number of network addresses
Subnet mask
Bandwidth of the IP ranges
192 168 3 255
192 168 4 0 Second IP range
192 1687 255
4x256–2 = 1022 devices
4x256–2 = 1022 devices
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-30 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.17. Calculation of IP Ranges - Alternative 
 
Alternative Calculation of the Bandwidth 
If the subnet mask is not stated in the classic representation as four octets (e.g. 255.255.255.0) 
but in the alternative presentation (e.g. /20), an easy calculation of the devices in a mask can also 
be done here. 
You take the subnet mask and subtract it from the next higher “network class”. In the example 
above this is 24 minus 20. The result, in this case 4, is then the exponent. To find the number of 
bandwidths in the respective range, you calculate 2 to the power of 4. That is, 24 results in a 
bandwidth of 16 for the individual IP ranges. 
The calculation of the maximum number of devices is identical to the classic calculation but it can 
also be more easily realized using the following method. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 24
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Calculation of IP Ranges - Alternative
/20192 168 116 100 IP address
24
192 168 0 0 First IP range
20-
= 4
Maximum number of Ones
Subnet mask
Number of Zeros in the octet
192 168 15 255
192 16816 0 Second IP range
192 168 31 255
16x256–2 = 4094 devices
16x256–2 = 4094 devices
= 16 2^4 = 16 Bandwidth of the IP ranges 
/8 /16 /24 /32 Network classes
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-31 
2.18. Alternative Calculation of Device Addresses 
 
Alternative Calculation of the Device Addresses 
A further possibility to find out how many device addresses / devices are now possible in an IP 
range is just as easy and efficient using the alternative representation of the subnet mask. 
You take the subnet mask and subtract it from the maximum number of Ones which would be 
theoretically possible in a subnet mask. In the example above this is 32 minus 20. The result, in 
this case 12, is then the exponent. To find the number of device addresses in every IP range, you 
calculate 2 to the power of 12. That is, 212 results in a maximum number of 4096 device 
addresses for the individual IP ranges. From this, two addresses, the network address and the 
broadcast address, still have to be deducted. This results in a maximum device number of 4094. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 25
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Alternative Calculation of Device Addresses
/20192 168 116 100 IP address
32
20-
= 12
Maximum number of Ones
Subnet mask
Number of Zeros in the mask
= 4094 2^12 = 4096 – 2 = 4094 devices 
/32 max. number of Ones
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-32 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.19. PING / Packet Internet Groper 
 
Ping / Packet Internet Groper 
Simply called “Ping”, this tool is probably the most widely used and most familiar tool for testing 
whether a network connection to another network device exists. 
A Ping can be executed via the search field in the Windows Start menu as well as in the 
command line. It is recommended, however, that you use the command line for a Ping since the 
popup window automatically closes after the Ping command is executed via the search field in the 
Windows Start menu. The command line can be opened by entering “cmd” in the Windows Start 
menu. 
Another way to open the command line is to start the execution window using the shortcut 
“Windows-key + R” and then entering the command “cmd”. 
On a Windows operating system, a Ping is executed four times one after the other by default. In 
order to execute a continuous ping, the Ping command can have a “-t” added to it. This 
continuous Ping as well as all other commands can be aborted in the command line by using the 
key combination “CTRL + C”! 
Function 
After entering the Ping command, the network device sends an ICMP-Packet (Internet Control 
Message Protocol) of the type ICMP Echo Request to the destinationaddress. As soon as this 
station has received the Packet, it sends an ICMP-Packet of the type ICMP Echo Reply back. 
The throughput time of a packet can be determined when the sender halves the time that has 
elapsed until the answer is received from the destination address 
Note 
By entering “ping” or “ping /?” in the command line, you can get an overview of all possible 
combinations that are possible with the Ping command. 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 26 Siemens AG © 2016
PING / Packet Internet Groper
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-33 
2.20. Task Description: 
IP Addresses and Subnet Masks 
 
Task Description 
In the following exercises, you are to calculate network addresses, broadcast addresses, device 
addresses and subnet masks. You are also to check whether various device addresses are valid 
addresses or not. 
Do not use any other tools such as a calculator, cell phone ☺, or similar for this. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 27
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Task Description:
IP Addresses & Subnet Masks
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-34 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.20.1. Exercise 1: Calculating with IP Addresses 
 
Task 
Each partial task has a different purpose. You are to calculate either the network addresses, the 
broadcast addresses, whether the device addresses are valid addresses, or, the number of 
maximum possible devices. 
Task 1 
Calculate the network address of the respective IP address. 
Network address for IP address 1: _______________________________________ 
Network address for IP address 2: _______________________________________ 
Task 2 
Calculate the broadcast address of the network in which the respective IP address is located. 
Broadcast address for IP address 3: _______________________________________ 
Broadcast address for IP address 4: _______________________________________ 
Task 3 
Are the following IP addresses valid device addresses? 
IP address 5: _______________________________________ 
IP address 6: _______________________________________ 
Task 4 
Calculate how many device addresses fit in the respective networks. 
Number of device addresses in Network 1: _______________________________________ 
Number of device addresses in Network 2: _______________________________________ 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 28
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Exercise 1: Calculating with IP Addresses
IP address 1: 192.168.113.16
Subnet mask: 255.255.248.0
IP address 2: 172.16.100.34/30
Task 1: Network addresses
IP address 3: 192.168.8.255
Subnet mask: 255.255.240.0
IP address 4: 10.0.50.1
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.252
Task 2: Broadcast addresses
IP address 1: 192.168.1.0
Subnet mask: 255.255.254.0
IP address 2:192.168.100.3/30
Task 3: Device addresses
Network 1: 192.168.0.0/29
Network 2: 10.0.0.0/22
Task 4: Number of devices
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-35 
2.20.2. Exercise 2: Subnetting 
 
Task 
You are to become familiar with subnet masks and solve the task asked below. 
Task 5 
Select the subnet masks in such a way that the subnets are, on the one hand, as small as 
possible, and on the other hand, all devices plus two buffer addresses fit in the subnets. 
Network mask & subnet mask for Subnet 1: _______________________________________ 
Network mask & subnet mask for Subnet 2: _______________________________________ 
Network mask & subnet mask for Subnet 3: _______________________________________ 
Network mask & subnet mask for Subnet 4: _______________________________________ 
Note 
Calculate the subnet mask plus the network address as the solution! 
Example: 192.168.200.64/28. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 29
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Exercise 2: Subnetting
You are to connect an automation network to an IT structure. For this, the Administrator of the IT 
network has reserved an IP address area for the automation: 
192.168.100.0/23 
You are to divide the automation network into suitable subnets based on its communication 
relationships. Select the subnet masks and the network addresses in such a way that the subnets 
which you form are as small as possible but always have two IP addresses / device addresses as a 
buffer for expansions.
Task 5: Subnetting
12 devices 30 devices 230 devices 40 devices
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-36 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.21. Access Procedure for Industrial Ethernet: CSMA/CD 
 
Collision Afflicted Shared Medium 
Historically, Ethernet is a protocol that works with a shared medium. This means that only one 
device at a time can send data on a line. If several devices simultaneously send information on 
the line, there is an overlapping and the information is lost. This is called a collision. An area in 
which collisions could occur is called collision domain. In traditional Ethernet, the entire network is 
a collision domain. 
Access Procedure: CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection) 
CSMA/CD is an access procedure that was developed to detect collisions on the line and, in this 
case, to resend the data. It can be subdivided into the following: 
• Carrier Sense (CS): 
Before data is sent, a check is made as to whether another device is already sending 
data. 
• Multiple Access (MA): 
In spite of a previous check, it can happen that two or more devices simultaneously 
transfer data. A collision can occur. 
• Collision Detection (CD): 
During sending, the devices check whether a collision has occurred on the line. If a 
collision is detected, the data is resent after a random waiting time which is determined 
according to the back-off algorithm. 
Note 
A collision is not a faulty behavior in the traditional Ethernet, but a consciously tolerated feature of 
the medium. The more devices exchange data in a network or the larger the collision domains, 
the more likely a collision is. This also means that with an increasing number of collisions, the 
data throughput rate sinks. 
In modern networks, collisions are no longer possible because of full duplex data transmission 
and the switches used. Today, CSMA/CD is therefore no longer used or required. . 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 30
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Access Procedure 
for Industrial Ethernet: CSMA/CD
No telegram traffic on the network Station A listens to the network and sends
Station D listens to the network and sends Collision on the network
Station A
Station B
Station C
Station D
Station A
Station B
Station C
Station D
Station A
Station B
Station C
Station D
Station A
Station B
Station C
Station D
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-37 
2.22. Duplex Mode 
 
Half Duplex Mode 
In communications engineering, half duplex mode is when communication is only possible 
alternately in one direction. Traditional Ethernet always worked in half duplex mode, since only 
one channel was available via the coaxial cable through which simultaneous data traffic was only 
possible in one direction. CSMA/CD ensured that collisions did not occur here. 
Full Duplex Mode 
The restriction that it is only possible to simultaneously send in one direction does not exist for 
modern Ethernet techniques. If twisted pair cables or fiber optic cables are used, you can usually 
work in full duplex mode. Here, it is possible to simultaneously send in both directions. Collisions 
do not occur and CSMA/CD is not used here.Since information is sent in both directions, the data 
throughput also increases. With full duplex, Fast Ethernet achieves 200 Mbit/s and Gigabit 
Ethernet 2Gbit/s. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 31
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Duplex Mode
Half duplex mode
Simultaneous communication only 
possible in one direction
Full duplex mode
Simultaneous communication in both 
directions possible
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-38 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.23. Types of Telegrams in Ethernet 
 
Distinction between the Recipients 
In general, Ethernet distinguishes between three types of telegram on the basis of the number of 
recipients - Unicasts, Multicasts and Broadcasts. 
Unicast 
A unicast is a telegram that has exactly one recipient. The MAC address of this recipient is 
specified as the destination MAC address in the Ethernet telegram. Bidirectional communication 
usually occurs via Unicasts. 
Multicast 
A multicast has several recipients. A telegram to several recipients is recognizable by the first bit 
of the MAC address (least significant bit). If this bit is “1”, the telegram is a multicast or broadcast. 
Intelligent network components are required for the correct forwarding of a multicast. If these are 
not able to filter multicasts, a multicast is handled like a broadcast. 
Broadcast 
A broadcast is a telegram to all Ethernet devices (subscribers). A broadcast always has the 
address “FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF” as the destination MAC address. 
Note 
In addition to the three already mentioned types of telegram, there is also the “Anycast” telegram 
type. However, in the world of automation it is rarely used. 
Anycast 
An anycast is really a unicast which is sent to all devices that have this anycast address. 
However, only the device which is accessible via the shortest route for the packet is addressed. 
This, in turn, is determined by the so-called routing protocol. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 32
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Types of Telegrams in Ethernet
Unicast
Multicast
Broadcast
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-39 
2.24. Ethernet HUB 
 
Ethernet HUB 
In Ethernet, a star distributor which has several connections is referred to as a hub. As a rule, 
HUBs have the following basic functions: 
• Reproduction of the physical interfaces 
• Improvement of the network quality compared to a pure coaxial segment through the 
restoration of signal amplitudes, the signal timing or the isolation of a faulty segment 
Expansion of the Collision Domain 
When a HUB is used, the network segment remains a shared medium and collisions continue to 
occur. The more HUBs are used, the larger the collision domain becomes and the lower the net 
throughput becomes. 
Principle of Telegram Forwarding 
With regard to telegram forwarding, a HUB has no intelligence. This means that all telegrams are 
always forwarded to all interfaces; regardless of which telegram type it is. A unicast is forwarded 
to all devices just like a broadcast. If the S7-1500 sends a telegram which is addressed to the S7-
300, the HUB nevertheless forwards it to all devices. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 33
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Ethernet Hub
HUB
All connected devices share 
the bandwidth
Only one device (at a 
time) can communicate
Whatever arrives at a port,
is output to all others
Symbol: HUB
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-40 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.25. Shared LAN  → Switched LAN 
 
Shared LAN 
In a Shared LAN, all connected devices share the bandwidth of the network. The network is 
therefore collision-afflicted and telegrams can be lost. A frame which is sent by a device goes 
through all segments. Therefore, there can only always be one telegram in a Shared LAN. 
The use of HUBs, repeaters and OLMs require compliance with configuration rules and in each 
case reduce the maximum extension of the network. 
Switched LAN 
In a Switched LAN, every connected device finds itself in its own collision domain. As a result, it 
can handle the entire bandwidth of the network. It is virtually impossible for collisions to occur in a 
Switched LAN! A frame which is sent by a device only goes through the segments which lie on 
the path to its receiver. Therefore, there can be several telegrams in a Switched LAN 
simultaneously. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 34
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Shared LAN → Switched LAN
Data traffic
Shared LAN
all devices in a collision domain
Switched LAN
all devices in their own collision domain
Separation of the collision domains
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-41 
2.26. Ethernet SWITCH 
 
Ethernet SWITCH 
In network technology, an Ethernet Switch refers to a device which physically and logically 
connects the network nodes with one another. Switches are now the standard components for 
connecting Ethernet devices to one another. 
Reduction of the Collision Domain 
A switch decouples its physical interfaces, also called ports, from one another. In half duplex 
mode, each port has its own collision domain(s). Modern switches and devices usually can 
handle full duplex mode which leads to a collision-free network. 
Principle of Telegram Forwarding 
Switches have certain intelligence and only forward telegrams to the desired addressees insofar 
as they are known. The rest of the network devices are not aware of the data exchange. There is 
no physical connection between each end device. For a unicast, the Source MAC Address and 
the Destination MAC Address is used to decide to which ports which telegram is forwarded. A 
switch is thus a device which works on the Data Link Layer of the OSI model. Multicasts and 
broadcasts are forwarded to several or all devices. Ideally, every final device receives only the 
data intended for it. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 35
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Whatever arrives at a port, 
is specifically forwarded
All devices can 
communicate simultaneously
All connected devices have 
the same bandwidth
Ethernet Switch
Switch
Symbol: 
SWITCH
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-42 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.27. Ethernet SWITCH Basics 
2.27.1. Ethernet SWITCH Basics 1 
 
Forwarding Database 
Based on the Destination MAC Address of an Ethernet telegram, a switch decides to which of its 
ports it specifically forwards which unicast telegrams. For this, it internally creates a database in 
which is stored which MAC address is accessible at which port. This database is called Filtering 
Database or also Forwarding Database (FDB). 
Forwarding Database for Cascading 
In the example, only one device each and with that only one MAC address was connected to 
each port of the switch. Thus, only one MAC address is assigned to each port. If, however, further 
network components such as switches or even HUBs are connected to a port, then more than 
one MAC address can be accessible on one port. 
The address of the connected switch is not listed since switches usually operate transparently in 
the network. Only Managed Switches actively generate telegrams and so are entered in the FDBs 
of the other switches. Here, they behave like final devices. It can therefore very well be that a port 
is assigned several MAC addresses! 
Unicast Learning 
The database is filled with the Source MAC Addresses of the telegrams received. With each 
forwarding of packets, these entries are compared with the DestinationMAC Address of the 
current telegram and only forwarded to the appropriate ports. This ensures that unicast telegrams 
are only forwarded to the appropriate ports. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 36
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Ethernet SWITCH Basics 1
Forwarding Database (FDB)
MAC Address Port Switch
▪MAC Address of A ▪P1
▪MAC Address of B ▪P2
▪MAC Address of C ▪P3
▪MAC Address of D ▪P4
MAC A MAC B
MAC C MAC D
P 1 P 2
P 3 P 4
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-43 
2.27.2. Ethernet SWITCH Basics 2 
 
Checking the Source MAC Address 
When the first telegram of device C reaches the switch, a check is made as to whether the 
Source MAC Address of this packet is already listed in the FDB of the switch. In other words, a 
check is made to see whether the switch already “knows” the device. If this is the case, the Aging 
Timer for the relevant entry is reset. 
If the MAC address (like here) is not listed, a new entry is created. This contains the MAC 
address of device C and the port P1. 
Checking the Destination MAC Address 
Next, a check is made as to whether the address of the recipient (in other words, the Destination 
MAC Address of the Ethernet telegram) is listed in the FDB. Since this is not the case, the 
telegram is forwarded to all ports (except that of the receiver). This ensures that the telegram 
reaches the appropriate end device. 
Deleting FDB Entries 
There are two ways of deleting addresses from the FDB. On the one hand, the associated MAC 
addresses are deleted for a Link Down of a port; on the other hand, old entries are sorted out 
based on an Aging Time. 
Link Down 
A Link Down refers to the pulling of a cable or the interruption of an existing connection through a 
cable break or similar. 
An active link is immediately established when a cable is inserted between two Ethernet devices 
(subscribers) (Lighting up of the usually green LED on the network port). 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 37
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Forwarding Database (FDB)
MAC-Adresse Port Switch
Ethernet SWITCH Basics 2
Forwarding Database (FDB)
MAC Address Port Switch
▪MAC Address of C ▪P3
Receipt of a telegram 
from C
Is the address of C 
in the FDB?
Yes
Reset the Aging Timer
Is the address of B 
in the FDB?
Device C sends a telegram to device B
Forward the packet to the 
port entered in the list
Wait for the next 
telegram
Enter address C and 
port 3 in the FDB 
No
Forward packet to all 
ports
NoYes
Aging Time approx. 
30 sec – 40 sec
Not at the receiving port!
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-44 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.27.3. Ethernet SWITCH Basics 3 
 
Checking the Source MAC Address 
When the first telegram of device B reaches the switch, a check is made as to whether the 
Source MAC Address of this packet is already listed in the FDB of the switch. In other words, a 
check is made to see whether the switch already “knows” the device. If this is the case, the Aging 
Timer for the relevant entry is reset. 
If the MAC address (like here) is not listed, a new entry is created. This contains the MAC 
address of device B and the port P2. 
The only way for a SWITCH to learn which network devices are connected to which of its ports is 
therefore via incoming Ethernet telegrams! 
Aging Time 
Every time a MAC address is entered in the database, a timer is started. If it expires, the entry is 
considered obsolete and is deleted. This so-called Aging Time is often 30 sec to 40 sec in the 
industrial environment and can be configured for Managed Switches. The Aging Time is stored in 
the Forwarding Database for every entry. For each packet that reaches the switch, the timer for 
the relevant Source MAC Address is reset. This procedure ensures that the FDB is always kept 
as current as possible. 
If entries didn’t have an expiry date, changes in the network would, under certain circumstances, 
not be detected. For cascading networks, it is entirely possible that the failure of a network 
participant or the replugging of the device in another port does not necessarily cause the link 
down of every port involved, in whose FDB this device is entered. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 38
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Ethernet SWITCH Basics 3
Forwarding Database (FDB)
MAC-Adresse Port Switch
▪MAC Adresse von C ▪P3
▪MAC Address of B ▪P2
Aging Time approx. 
30 sec – 40 sec
Receipt of a telegram 
from B
Is the address of B 
in the FDB?
Yes
Reset the Aging Timer
Is the address of C 
in the FDB?
Device B sends a telegram to device C
Forward the packet to the 
port entered in the list
Wait for the next 
telegram
Enter address B and 
port 2 in the FDB 
No
Forward packet to all 
ports
NoYes
A SWITCH only learns its port 
allocation through incoming telegrams!
Forwarding Database (FDB)
MAC Address Port Switch
▪MAC Address of C ▪P3
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-45 
2.28. Switching Methods 
2.28.1. Store and Forward 
 
Store and Forward 
With this switching method, each Ethernet telegram is completely read in before it is forwarded. If 
the telegram length is in the valid range of the Ethernet Standard, the checksum is calculated and 
compared to the FCS stored in the telegram. If the values are divergent, the data is rejected and 
not forwarded. If they match, the switch passes through the various phases of the packet 
forwarding. With this method, no invalid, too short or too long Ethernet frames are forwarded in 
the network. This is the most commonly used switching procedure. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 39
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Switching Methods - Store and Forward
Source port
Frame
Switch
Frame is detected at the source port
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Source port
Switch
Entire frame is read in
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
Source port
Switch
FCS is checked and the destination port is 
determined based on the destination 
address 
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
Source port
Switch
Frame sent to the destination address or 
rejected
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-46 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.28.2. Cut Through 
 
Cut Through 
With Cut Through, the telegram is already forwarded as soon as the Destination MAC Address 
has been read in. However, the FCS is also calculated and compared. The problem is, however, 
that the forwarding cannot be reversed. As a result, the sending is simply aborted for an invalid 
FCS. This behavior ensures that, under certain circumstances, invalid, too short or even too long 
packets are forwarded which have to be filtered by downstream network components or by the 
end node. You achieve, however, very short latencies. Cut Through is used for very time-critical 
applications such as PROFINET IRT. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 40
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Switching Methods – Cut Through
Source port
Frame
Switch
Frame is detected at the source port
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Source port
Switch
Destination address is read in
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
Source port
Switch
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
Source port
Switch
FCS is, however, still checked! If 
something doesn’t fit, sending is aborted!
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame is sent to destination address
Industrial Communication, PROFINETwith Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-47 
2.28.3. Fragment Free 
 
Fragment Free Switching 
This method is a special form of Cut Through. Once again, the entire telegram is not read in. 
However, at least 64 bytes are always read in before forwarding begins. In this way, you can 
realize very time-critical applications and ensure that at least telegrams which are too short are 
not forwarded. Fragment Free is a very special procedure and is not used very often. 
Note 
Fragments which are under 64 bytes are usually the debris of a collision that no longer make up a 
useful frame! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 41
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Switching Methods – Fragment Free
Source port
Frame
Switch
Frame is detected at the source port
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Source port
Switch
Minimum length of 64 bytes is checked
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
Source port
Switch
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
Source port
Switch
Frame is sent to destination address
Address tableStore Switch
Fabric
Destination port
Frame
The destination port is determined based 
on the destination address
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-48 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.29. Switching Telegram Forwarding 
2.29.1. Prioritization through the PCP 
 
Prioritization with the Help of the Priority Code Point (PCP) 
In the PCP (Priority Code Point) of the VLAN tag, a number is stored with which the type of traffic 
can be classified. It is used to give priority to certain telegrams over others. 
This is relevant when a switch is working to capacity and it cannot forward the telegrams quickly 
enough. Data must be buffered or, in the worst case, rejected. If a telegram then has a higher 
priority than the other telegrams, it is forwarded before the others. In this way, it can be ensured 
that this telegram is not rejected! 
Prioritization Levels 
The different priority levels are specified in the IEEE 802.1Q-2005 as follows: 
 
PCP Priority Classification 
1 0 (lowest) Background 
0 1 Best Effort 
2 2 Excellent Effort 
3 3 Critical Applications 
4 4 Video 
5 5 Voice 
6 6 Internetwork Control 
7 7 (highest) Network Control 
PROFINET uses the PCP Priority 6! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 42
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Switch – Prioritization of Telegrams (PCP)
Telegram with 
higher PCP
Theoretical simultaneous arrival of two telegrams with different priorities 
Telegrams with higher PCP are forwarded 
with priority
PCP
Telegram 1 6
Telegram 2 0
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-49 
2.29.2. Processing Telegrams through Queues 
 
Queues in the Switch 
The prioritization is realized through so-called queues in the Switching ASIC of the switch. The 
prioritization of telegrams is only relevant when a switch becomes overloaded or several 
telegrams arrive simultaneously. Depending on the performance class, switches have differing 
numbers of queues (two to eight). 
Siemens switches have two ways of processing these queues: 
• Strict Priority Queuing 
• Weighted Round Robin Priority Queuing 
Strict Priority Queuing 
The queues are emptied in a fixed order. In the example above, first Queue four, then Queue 
number three, etc. As long as telegrams are buffered in Queue four, no telegram from the other 
Queues is forwarded. If there are telegrams in Queue three, no telegrams from Number two or 
Number one are forwarded. 
Weighted Round Robin Priority Queuing 
All queues from the highest to the lowest priority are passed through. If there are telegrams in a 
queue, they are forwarded. A maximum of X telegrams at a time are sent from a queue, whereby 
X depends on the priority. This procedure ensures that no telegrams remain in low priority queues 
if a high priority device (for example, in case of a failure) generates too much load. 
PCP to Queue Mapping 
The decision which telegram is buffered in which queue is decided by the PCP value of the VLAN 
tag. An internal table is stored in each switch. This table defines which PCP value is assigned to 
which queue. Ex works, the mapping is configured according to IEEE 802.1Q. For modern 
switches, this mapping can, however, also often be adjusted to your own requirements. 
In the picture, the mapping is presented according to IEEE 802.1Q-2003. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 43
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Switch – Mechanismus der Priorisierung (Queuing)
The PCP value decides in which queue 
which telegram is put
Queue
1 (low priority)
2
3
4 (high priority)
PCP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Depending on the switch, 2-8 queues are 
possible
PROFINET uses the PCP Priority 6
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-50 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.30. Task Description: Setting the Field PG IP Address and Resetting 
Devices to Factory Settings 
 
Task Description 
You are to give the Field PG a fixed IP address for all subsequent exercises. This must be 
defined in the network card settings. For this, you are to select one of the two network cards and 
give it a static IP address. Then, you are to reset all devices to factory settings. To do this, you 
must first connect each of the devices to one another. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 44
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Task Description: Setting the Field PG IP Address 
and Resetting Devices to Factory Settings
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-51 
2.30.1. Exercise 3: 
Selecting the Field PG Ethernet Card 
 
Task 
You are to select the virtual interface from the VM-ware which is bridged to the
 of the Field PG. 
What to Do 
1. Configure the interface as shown in the picture. 
Note 
The identification of the network card of the M5 Field PG is easier “to remember” with the 
following. If you stand in front of the device, that is, can look on the display, the left interface is the 
 and the right interface is the 
. 
This is easier to remember if you regard (memorize) the interface with “L” in the name as the left 
interface and the interface with “LM” as the left-middle, that is the right interface. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 45
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Exercise 3: Selecting the Field PG Network Card
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-52 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.30.2. Exercise 4: Opening the Adapter Settings 
 
Task 
In the Control Panel, you are to open the adapter settings. 
What to Do 
1. Open the Start menu. 
2. Switch to the Control Panel. 
3. Open the Network and Sharing Center. 
4. Go into the menu item “Change adapter settings”. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 46
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Exercise 4: Opening the Adapter Settings
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-53 
2.30.3. Exercise 5: Assigning the Field PG a Static IP Address 
 
Task 
For the network card you selected in Exercise 3, you are now to assign a static IP address. 
What to Do 
1. With a double-click, open the Status of the network card (LAN-Connection Status) you 
 selected. 
2. Switch to the Properties of the network card. 
3. Highlight the element “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)”. 
4. Open the Properties of this element. 
5. Using the Ping function of your computer,check whether the IP address 192.168.222.250 is 
already assigned. If yes, ask the Instructor to come to you before you continue! 
6. Use the IP address 192.168.222.250 for this interface. Use the Subnet mask 255.255.255.0. 
7. Confirm your changes. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 47
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Exercise 5: 
Assigning the Field PG a Static IP Address
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-54 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.30.4. Exercise 6: Networking the Devices 
 
Task 
You are to network the devices with one another. You are to proceed as shown in the picture. 
What to Do 
1. Network the S7-1510SP-1PN CPU with Port P1 of the SCALANCE XC208. 
2. Then, network the network card selected by you with Port P2 of the SCALANCE XC208. 
3. Finally, connect Port P2 of your S7-1500 case with Port P3 of the SCALANCE XC208. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 48 Siemens AG © 2016
Exercise 6: Networking the Devices
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-55 
2.30.5. Exercise 7: Resetting the Devices to Factory Settings 
 
Task 
You are to reset all devices, which you networked with one another in the previous exercise, to 
their factory settings. For this, you are to use the TIA Portal. 
What to Do 
1. Start the TIA Portal. 
2. Expand the menu item “Online access”. 
3. Expand your selected interface. If the wiring is correct, the interface should be identified with 
the following symbol: 
4. Update the accessible devices. 
5. One after the other reset all accessible devices to their factory settings. Should there be a 
choice whether the IP address is to be retained or deleted, delete it. So that the factory 
settings can be re-established for the HMI device via the Online access, the Runtime must be 
exited for this! 
6. Finally, update the accessible devices. There should no longer be an IP address for any 
device! 
Note 
To fulfill this task, you do not have to create a project yet, nor do you have to open an existing 
project! 
Furthermore, your computer must be in the same subnet as the devices which you want to reset 
to their factory settings. 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 49
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Exercise 7: 
Resetting the Devices to Factory Settings
HMI Runtime must be 
exited
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-56 Training Document, V15.01.00 
For a PLC with Memory Card, the card must first be formatted before you reset to factory 
settings! Otherwise, a reset to factory settings is not possible! 
 
 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-57 
2.31. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to complete a topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 50 Siemens AG © 2016
Additional Information
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-58 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.31.1. ISO / OSI 7 – Layer Model 
 
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) – Model 
The OSI – 7 Layer Model is a reference model for manufacturer-independent communication 
systems, that is, a design basis for communication protocols and computer networks. 
OSI stands for Open Systems Interconnection and was designed and standardized by ISO as the 
basis for communication standards. The OSI layer model or OSI reference model is based on the 
DoD layer model on which the Internet is based. In comparison to the DoD layer model, the OSI 
layer model is more finely subdivided. 
DoD layer model (Department of Defense): 
 
 
 
The OSI model serves as a tool for describing the principle function of a network. It is divided into 
seven sub-areas which are also referred to a layers. Each layer, with the exception of the 
uppermost layers, makes its function available to the layers above it. The most important layers 
for Ethernet are Layer 1 and Layer 2. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 51
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
ISO / OSI 7 – Layer Model
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
Anwendungs-
orientiert
Transport-
orientiert
Transport-
orientiert
Transport-
orientiert
transport-
oriented
Anwendungs-
orientiert
application-
oriented
7. Application Layer
6. Presentation Layer
5. Session Layer
4. Transport Layer
3. Network Layer
2. Data Link Layer
1. Physical Layer
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-59 
For each layer, functions and protocols are defined which must fulfill specific tasks for the 
communication between two systems. For communication between two systems, the 
communication or the data flow passes through all 7 layers of the OSI layer model twice - once at 
the Sender and once at the Recipient. Depending on how many ‘stops’ the communication route 
has, the communication also passes through the layer model several times. 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-60 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.31.1.1. Layer 1: Physical Layer 
 
Physical Layer 
In the physical layer, the electrical, optical and mechanical connection to the transmission 
medium used is defined. It is responsible for the proper transmission of individual bits through the 
physical channel. This is essentially a matter of the coding of signals, the defining of the 
transmission medium and the transmission devices. 
Each medium has its own section. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 52 Siemens AG © 2016
Layer 1: Physical Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
1. Physical Layer:
Measures and procedures for transmitting bit sequences
▪ Devices and network components are assigned to the 
Physical Layer
▪ Defines the optical, electrical and mechanical connection 
to the transmission medium
▪ Manages the coding of the individual bits or the bit 
sequences
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-61 
2.31.1.2. Layer 2: Data Link Layer 
 
Data Link Layer 
In the data link layer, the transmission and the grouping of the individual bits in the transferable 
unit as well as the access procedure to the network is defined. It provides a reliable connection 
between terminal and transmission medium and ensures an error-free transmission. 
For this, the bit data flow is divided into (data) blocks, also called frames, and checksums are 
added. With this checksum, flawed blocks can be detected by the recipient and subsequently be 
rejected or even be corrected. 
According to IEEE, the Data Link Layer is divided into two sublayers - the Logical Link Control 
and the Media Access Control. Due to the Media Access Control, the data link layer is sometimes 
also called the MAC Layer. 
Media Access Control 
The Media Access Control layer is the lower of the two layers in the data link layer. It controls the 
access to the transmission medium. It defines which protocol is to be used. There are two 
different types of access, a controlled access and a competing access. 
Controlled access: 
• Token Ring 
• Token Bus 
• CSMA/CR 
Competing access: 
• ALOHA 
• CSMA/CD 
• CSMA/CA 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics ofIndustrial Ethernet Page 53 Siemens AG © 2016
Layer 2: Data Link Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
Logical Link Control
Media Access Control
2. Data Link Layer:
Logical connections to data packets and elementary error 
detection mechanisms
▪ Consists of two sublayers, the Logical Link Control layer 
as well as the Media Access Control layer
▪ Divides the bit data flow into blocks or frames and adds a 
checksum
▪ Ensures a reliable and error-free transmission on the 
transmission medium
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-62 Training Document, V15.01.00 
Logical Link Control 
The Logical Link Control layer is the upper of the two layers in the data link layer. It adds several 
identifiers to the data packet which are structured as follows: 
• DSAP (Destination Service Access Point) of 8 bytes 
• SSAP (Source Service Access Point) of 8 bytes 
• Control of 8 or 16 bytes 
Note 
A renewed request of rejected blocks is not regulated or provided in the data link layer! 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-63 
2.31.1.3. Layer 3: Network Layer 
 
Network Layer 
The task of the Network Layer is the transmission of data packets between the sender and the 
recipient. This includes the routing of the packets, the logical addressing of terminals and the flow 
control. 
Included in the Network Layer is, for example, the Internet Protocol or also the NSAP addresses. 
Note 
If communication between the sender and the recipient cannot take place directly, but only via 
intermediate ‘stops’, the forwarding of packets occurs in the Network Layer. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 54 Siemens AG © 2016
3. Network Layer:
Routing and data flow control
▪ It is responsible for the transmission of data packets 
between the sender and the recipient
▪ The Internet Protocol, for example, belongs to the Network 
Layer
Layer 3: Network Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-64 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.31.1.4. Layer 4: Transport Layer 
 
Transport Layer 
The Transport Layer ensures data transmission beyond network boundaries, which is managed in 
the LAN by the Data Link Layer. It is intended to have a logical connection to a remote 
communication partner which is checked by acknowledgement telegrams. Connection-less 
services are also supported. 
Note 
The Transport Layer offers Layers 5 to 7 a uniform access to the data. As a result, they do not 
have to take the properties of the communication network into consideration. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 55 Siemens AG © 2016
4. Transport Layer:
Logical end-to-end connections
▪ It is the link between the transport-oriented layers and the 
application-oriented layers
▪ Ensures data transmission beyond network boundaries
Layer 4: Transport Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-65 
2.31.1.5. Layer 5: Session Layer 
 
Session Layer 
The task of the Session Layer is the organization of the communication between the recipient and 
the sender. It provides services for an organized and synchronized data exchange. If, for 
example, during communication a connection is lost, the session can be continued at so-called 
check points and doesn’t have to start at the beginning. 
The RPC Protocol (Remote Procedure Call) is included in this layer. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 56 Siemens AG © 2016
5. Session Layer:
Process-to-process connections
▪ Provides the process communication between two 
systems
▪ Provides services for a synchronized and organized data 
exchange (Check Points)
Layer 5: Session Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-66 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.31.1.6. Layer 6: Presentation Layer 
 
Presentation Layer 
The Presentation Layer makes data exchange between different systems possible. This is 
achieved by converting system-dependent presentations of data into an independent form. 
Furthermore, data compression as well as data encryption belongs to the Presentation Layer. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 57 Siemens AG © 2016
6. Presentation Layer:
Output of data in standard formats 
▪ Converts the data into different codecs and formats
▪ Makes data exchange between different systems possible 
through independent standard formats
Layer 6: Presentation Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-67 
2.31.1.7. Layer 7: Application Layer 
 
Application Layer 
The Application Layer establishes the connection to the lower layers and provides functions for 
the applications. The data input and the data output also takes place in this layer. 
It includes the user-specific services of the various communication applications! 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 58 Siemens AG © 2016
7. Application Layer:
Services, applications and network management 
▪ Establishes the connection to the lower layers
▪ Manages the data input and the data output
Layer 7: Application Layer
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-68 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.31.2. TRACERT / Trace Route 
 
TRACERT / Trace Route 
In addition to the Ping command to determine whether a connection exists to a network 
component, the TRACERT command can be executed to receive further information. 
With the “tracert” command, the path of data packets in an IP network can be tracked and made 
visible. 
Note 
Just as with the Ping command, you can get a listing of all possible combinations with the 
“tracert” command by entering “tracert” or “tracert /?”. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of Industrial Ethernet Page 59 Siemens AG © 2016
TRACERT / Trace Route
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
Training Document, V15.01.00 2-69 
2.31.3. IP Address V6 
 
IP Address V6 
An IPv6 address consists of 128 bits and thus allows an address amount of 2128 or also written as 
340,282,366,900,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 IPv6 addresses. In comparison, IPv4 
allows 4.3 billion addresses. That is, 6x1023 addresses per m2 of the earth’s surface including 
areas of water can be assigned! 
An IPv6 address is subdivided into 8 times 16 bits. These 16 bits are represented as a 
hexadecimal number per each 4 bits. The presentation of an IPv6 address is therefore 
hexadecimal. The 8 blocks of 4 hexadecimal numbers each are separated by a colon “:”. In order 
to ensure a simplified notation, leading zeros in a block can be omitted and a string of zeros can 
be replaced by two colons “::”. However, the last simplification can only be used once in an IPv6 
address! 
The first 64 bits of an IPv6 addressare referred to as the Network Prefix and the last 64 bits as 
the Interface Identifier. 
The notation of the hexadecimal characters should also be noted for an IPv6 address. By 
definition, these must be written in lower case and must not be written in upper case! 
Note 
There is an Internet Stream Protocol which has identified its own packets with an IPv5 identifier. 
However, this was never publically used and was only used for experiments. In order to avoid 
confusion and possible complications, it was however therefore determined to call the new 
address type IPv6 and not IPv5. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 60
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
IPv6
2001:0db8:85a3:08d3:1319:8a2e:0370:7344192.168.0.2
IPv4
An IPv6 address is represented in 8 blocks à 4 hex, separated by a colon
IPv6
Decimal format Hexadecimal format
2001:0db8:85a3:08d3
Network Prefix (64 bits)
1319:8a2e:0370:7344
Interface Identifier (64 bits)
2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:8a2e:0070:7344 IPv6 address
2001:db8:0:0:0:8a2e:70:7344 Leading zeros can be omitted
2001:0db8::8a2e:0070:7344 Several zeros can be omitted
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of Industrial Ethernet 
2-70 Training Document, V15.01.00 
2.31.4. Special IP Area Ranges / IP Addresses 
 
Special IP Area Ranges / IP Addresses 
It was established and incorporated in the devices that special IP addresses and also IP area 
ranges are used for specified tasks. These tasks are incorporated in the hardware of the devices 
and can only be used for these, that is, should only be used for these. 
The picture shows a brief overview. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 61
IK-TIAPN
Basics of Industrial Ethernet
Special IP Area Ranges / IP Addresses
Address area Meaning
0.0.0.0/8 Hosts on the local network. Only as source address.
10.0.0.0/8 Private addresses. Not in use on the public Internet
127.0.0.0/8 Loopback addresses. Typically only 127.0.0.1 is used.
169.254.0.0/16 “Link-Local-Address”, can only be used on a Link.
172.16.0.0/12 Private addresses. Not in use in the public network.
192.168.0.0/16 Private addresses. Not in use in the public network.
224.0.0.0/4 IPv4 Multicast addresses, only as destination address.
240.0.0.0/4 Reserved addresses with the exception of 255.255.255.255.
255.255.255.255/32 Broadcast address. Can only be used in the local network.
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-1 
 
Contents 3 
 
 
 
 
 
3. Basics of PROFINET .............................................................................................. 3-2 
3.1. PROFINET ............................................................................................................................ 3-3 
3.2. PROFINET vs. PROFIBUS ................................................................................................... 3-4 
3.3. PROFINET Communication Model ....................................................................................... 3-5 
3.4. Real-time Communication in PROFINET ............................................................................. 3-6 
3.5. Network Components in PROFINET .................................................................................... 3-7 
3.6. I/O Communication via PROFINET IO ................................................................................. 3-8 
3.7. PROFINET Device Addressing ........................................................................................... 3-10 
3.8. PRONETA ........................................................................................................................... 3-11 
3.8.1. Task Description: PRONETA – IP Addresses & Device Names of the Network Components 
& Line Test .......................................................................................................................... 3-12 
3.8.1.1. Exercise 1: Assigning IP Addresses to the Devices using the PRONETA Tool ................. 3-13 
3.8.1.2. Exercise 2: Initializing the Network Components with the PROFINET Device Name using 
PRONETA ........................................................................................................................... 3-14 
3.9. Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 3-15 
3.9.1. PI - PROFIBUS and PROFINET International .................................................................... 3-16 
3.9.2. Primary Setup Tool – PST .................................................................................................. 3-17 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3. Basics of PROFINET 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of PROFINET Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... know what is meant by the term “PROFINET”
... understand the basic functioning of PROFINET 
… be familiar with the Primary Setup Tool 
… be familiar with the PRONETA tool
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-3 
3.1. PROFINET 
 
PROFINET 
PROFINET combines the advantages of two worlds. It provides the properties of PROFIBUS 
needed for industrial use and combines them with the properties of Ethernet. This results in a 
flexible, efficient and high-performance system: PROFINET. The following pages explain how 
PROFINET works and why. 
Advantages of Ethernet in Automation 
• With the future demands placed on performance and data quantities, the fieldbus is 
reaching its limit 
• Ethernet offers a powerful and future-proof communication platform through continued 
technical development 
• Vertical integration offers previously unused productivity potential through the connection 
of the office and automation worlds 
• In the office world, Ethernet is the unequivocal standard regarding installation technology 
and protocols Token Bus (802.4) 
Features of PROFINET 
• Internationally standardized: IEC 61158, IEC 61784 
• Integrated communication via fieldbus and Ethernet 
• Integration of existing fieldbus systems (PROFIBUS, ASI) 
• Use of the TCP/IP protocol 
• Communication in real-time 
• Isochronous drive control for Motion Control applications via IRT 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
PROFINET
PROFINET is Ethernet
▪ Ethernet is the established standard in the IT world for the 
fast exchange of data (IEEE 802.3)
▪ PROFINET is always full duplex → simultaneous 
communication in two directions
▪ PROFINET is always 
“switched Ethernet”
▪ Distribution of network load
can be influenced using 
topology
▪ PROFINET uses the 
standardized structure of 
Ethernet telegrams
For comparison: PROFIBUS
▪ One line to which all 
nodes (devices) are 
connected
▪ Performance directly 
dependent on the number 
of nodes (devices)
Controller
Slaves
Devices
100 MBit/s full duplex
Master
100 MBit/s
100 MBit/s
PROFINET completely uses all possibilities offered by Ethernet
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3.2. PROFINET vs. PROFIBUS 
 
PROFINET vs. PROFIBUS 
The picture shows the most important characteristics and differences between the two bus 
systems. 
 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
PROFIBUS vs. PROFINET
Property PROFIBUS PROFINET
Bit transfer EIA-485 100 Base-TX, 100 Base-FX
Cable 2-wire 4-wire
Max. length 1200m / segment
Unlimited / network; up to 100 m / copper 
cable
Transmission rate
9.6 kBit/s – 12 Mbit/s 
Half duplex
100 Mbit/s Full duplex
Topology Line, Tree,Ring Line, Star, Ring, Tree, Wireless
Data transmission Common medium Switched network
User data/Frame 246 bytes 1440 bytes
Devices Up to 32 / segment
Unlimited / network; 
up to 256 IO-Devices per IO-Controller
Addresses DP address: 1…125 Device name (unlimited number)
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-5 
3.3. PROFINET Communication Model 
 
IT Standards 
The WEB integration of PROFINET was primarily designed with commissioning and diagnostics 
in mind. Standard protocols (e.g. http) are used to access a PROFINET device from the Internet 
or Intranet. The data is transmitted in standard formats, such as, HTML or XML and can be 
presented with standard browsers, such as, Firefox or Internet Explorer. 
Due to the world-wide accessibility, it is possible for the application producer to easily support the 
user in commissioning, device diagnostics etc. The access to the data takes place via web 
servers which are integrated in the modules. 
Real-time Channel (RT channel) 
In order to be able to satisfy the real-time requirements of automation, an optimized 
real-time communication channel, the real-time channel (RT channel), was specified in 
PROFINET. It builds on Ethernet (Layer 2). 
The data packets are addressed on the basis of the MAC addresses of the devices involved 
instead of on an IP address. This type of solution minimizes the processing times in the 
communication stack considerably and leads to an increase in performance with regards to the 
update rate of automation data. Removing several protocol layers reduces the (telegram) frame 
length. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 5
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
PROFINET Communication Model
Prioritization of the RT frames by means of VLAN tagging according to IEEE 802.1q
Ethernet
TCP/UDP 
R
e
a
lt
im
e
PROFINET applications
1
IT applications
• HTTP
• SNMP
• DHCP …
2
Open TCP/IP channel
• Device 
parameterization
• Reading diagnostic 
data
• Negotiating the 
communication channel 
for user data
1
2
Standard data Realtime data
IP 
RT Real-time channel
• High performance 
transmission
• Cyclic data
• Event-controlled 
messages
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3.4. Real-time Communication in PROFINET 
 
Optimized Data Transmission through Prioritization 
In addition to the minimized communication stack in the programmable controllers, transmission 
of data over the network is also optimized in PROFINET. Measurements have shown that in 
switched networks, for an extremely high network load, transmission times of up to 20 ms can 
occur between two stations on Ethernet. A network load of this size cannot be ruled out when 
using standard network components, for example, when simultaneously uploading quality data 
from the devices. In order to be able to achieve the best result here too, the packets are 
prioritized in PROFINET according to IEEE 802.1q (VLAN). 
The network components control the data flow between the devices on the basis of these 
priorities. Priority 6 (Network Control) is used as the standard priority for real-time data. This 
causes a priority handling over other applications, such as, Internet telephony with Priority 5. 
The prioritization of PROFINET telegrams with the help of the VLAN tag only causes the 
PROFINET telegrams to be preferentially sent. Due to the PCP, however, the sending of a lower 
priority telegram is not interrupted! 
If, for example, video data with the same priority as the PROFINET data occurs, a difference can 
be detected in the RT transmission: → longer jitter times. 
Solution: use IRT functionality by means of IRT switches. 
Network components and controllers available on the market can be used for real-time 
communication. Of course, only on the premise that the switches used can evaluate the priority of 
the PROFINET telegram. 
IRT Channel 
Isochronous Real - Time (IRT) as a further development with the following properties: 
• Isochronous data transmission 
• Cycle times <1ms with jitter accuracy <1µs 
• Typical area of application is Motion Control 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 6
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
Real-time Communication in PROFINET
Real-time data and standard 
data on one cable
Separate channels for IO-
data and TCP/IP data
Prioritization of IO-data 
according to IEEE 802.1q 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-7 
3.5. Network Components in PROFINET 
 
Devices for PROFINET IO 
The general names of the most important devices in PROFINET are presented in the picture. The 
following contains a brief explanation of the terms: 
• IO-Controller: 
Device through which the connected IO-Devices are addressed. This means that the IO-
Controller exchanges the input and output signals with the connected field devices. It 
corresponds to Class-1-Master in PROFIBUS. 
• IO-Device: 
A distributed-arranged field device which is assigned to an IO-Controller, for example, 
distributed IO, valve block, frequency inverter, switches with integrated PROFINET IO 
functionality. In PROFIBUS, an IO-Device corresponds to the Slave. 
• IO-Supervisor: 
PG/PC/HMI device for commissioning and / or for diagnosis. In PROFIBUS, it 
corresponds to a Class-2-Master. 
• I-Device: 
Intelligent IO-Device. A PLC is not configured as an IO-Controller, but as an I-Device and 
provides a higher-level controller with I/O data in a transfer area. 
• HMI: 
Device for operator control and monitoring. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
Network Components in PROFINET
PROFINET IO-System
IO-Controller
I-Device
IO-Device HMI
PROFINET / Industrial Ethernet
S7-1500
S7-300 ET200 MP
PG/PC
IO-Supervisor
TP
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3.6. I/O Communication via PROFINET IO 
 
PROFINET Communication 
PROFINET communication takes place via Industrial Ethernet. The following types of 
transmission are supported: 
• Acyclic transmission of engineering and diagnostic data and alarms 
• Cyclic transmission of user data 
PROFINET IO communication occurs in real-time. 
I/O Communication 
The reading or writing of inputs/outputs of distributed IO through PROFINET IO occurs via so-
called I/O communication. The picture shows the various network components between which 
communication can take place in PROFINET: 
• IO-Controller - IO-Controller communication via PN/PN coupler 
• IO-Controller - IO-Device communication 
• IO-Controller - I-Device communication 
IO-Controller – IO-Controller Communication via PN/PN Coupler 
A fixed number of data is cyclically transmitted between the user programs in CPUs of IO-
Controllers. A PN/PN coupler is required as additional hardware. 
The IO-Controllers mutually access configured address areas, so-called Transfer areas, which 
can be located within or outside of the process image of the CPUs. If parts of the process image 
are used as Transfer areas, these must not be used for real I/O modules. 
The data transmission occurs with Load and Transfer operations via the process image (tables) 
or via direct access. 
IO-Controller – IO-Device Communication 
The IO-Controller cyclically sends data to the IO-Devices of its PROFINET IO-System and 
receives data from them. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 8
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
IO-Device
PN/PN-Coupler
PROFINET IO 3
PROFINET IO 2
I-Device
PROFINET IO 1
IO-Controller
I/O Communication via PROFINET IO
IO-Controller
I-Device
IO-Controller
I-Device
IO-Device IO-Device I-Device
IO-Controller –
I-Device 
communication
IO-Controller –
IO-Device 
communication
IO-Controller– IO-Controller communication via PN/PN coupler
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-9 
IO-Controller – I-Device Communication 
A fixed number of data is cyclically transmitted between the user programs in CPUs of IO-
Controllers and I-Devices. 
The IO-Controller does not access I/O modules of the I-Device but configured address areas, so-
called Transfer areas, which can be located within or outside of the process image of the CPU of 
the I-Device. If parts of the process image are used as Transfer areas, these must not be used for 
real I/O modules. 
The data transmission occurs with Load and Transfer operations via the process image (tables) 
or via direct access. 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3.7. PROFINET Device Addressing 
 
PROFINET IO-System 
So that the IO-Devices are accessible for the IO-Controller, they must be supplied with unique 
address parameters. Each IO-Device has three address parameters for the complete address: 
• MAC Address: 
Each PROFINET device already has a burnt-in, world-wide unique MAC address when it 
is delivered. As a rule, this cannot be changed. It is required for the real-time 
communication. 
• Device Name: 
Before an IO-Device can be addressed by an IO-Controller, it must have a device name. 
For PROFINET, this approach was selected because names are easier to manage than 
complex IP addresses. 
• IP Address: 
In addition to the device name and the MAC address, an IO-Device also requires an IP 
address so that, for example, acyclic Read/Write services can be executed. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 9
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
PROFINET Device Addressing
MAC address
IP address
MAC address
Device name
IP address
IO-Device
IO-Controller
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-11 
3.8. PRONETA 
 
PRONETA 
SIEMENS PRONETA is a free PC-based software tool which simplifies the commissioning of 
PROFINET systems by being able to take over the following tasks: 
• Topology Overview (Network Analysis): 
PRONETA automatically scans the PROFINET and all connected components and then 
displays a topologic overview. This overview can be exported in the form of a device list. 
It is possible to “initialize” the components and do other simple configuration tasks as well 
as comparing the real configuration with a reference plant. 
• IO Test: 
PRONETA allows for an IO-Test for quickly testing the wiring of a plant and the module 
expansion of components. By reading or writing the inputs and outputs, PRONETA 
ensures that the distributed I/Os are correctly wired with their sensors and 
actuators.PRONETA can create test profile templates and store test protocols in order to 
document the test results. 
All of these tasks can be carried out even before a CPU is integrated in the network. 
Moreover, since neither other engineering tools nor hardware are required, PRONETA makes 
the fast and easy testing of the plant configuration possible at an early point in time. 
PRONETA is an official product of Industrial Communication under PROFINET and so can 
also be found on the SIEMENS pages: 
http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/automation/de/industrielle-
kommunikation/profinet/produktportfolio/proneta/Seiten/proneta.aspx 
 
Note 
You will find further information, documentation as well as the download for the PRONETA Tool 
on the Service & Support pages under the Entry ID number: 67460624. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 10
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
PRONETA
Entry ID: 67460624
http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/automation/de/industrielle-kommunikation/profinet/produktportfolio/proneta/Seiten/proneta.aspx
http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/automation/de/industrielle-kommunikation/profinet/produktportfolio/proneta/Seiten/proneta.aspx
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3.8.1. Task Description: PRONETA – 
IP Addresses & Device Names of the Network Components & Line Test 
 
Task Description 
Before you can read out the networking configuration, make the renewed assignment of the IP 
addresses and the device names as well as do the line test with the help of the PRONETA tool, 
all devices must once again be reset to factory settings. Afterwards, do the steps above for the 
devices. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of PROFINET Page 17 Siemens AG © 2016
Task Description: PRONETA – IP Addresses & 
Device Names of the Network Components
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-13 
3.8.1.1. Exercise 1: Assigning IP Addresses to the Devices using the PRONETA Tool 
 
Task 
With the help of the PRONETA tool, you are once again to assign an IP address to all network 
devices. Again, the devices are to be given the following IP addresses: 
• S7-1513-1PN: 192.168.222.1 
• ET200SP: 192.168.222.2 
• TP700 Comfort: 192.168.222.3 
• SCALANCE X208: 192.168.222.4 
• S7-1510SP-1PN : 192.168.222.5 
All devices are to be assigned the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. 
What to Do 
1. Start the PRONETA tool. 
2. Switch to the “Network analysis” view 
3. In any order you like, assign all network components the IP addresses as well as the subnet 
mask defined in the task. 
Note 
Even the PRONETA tool allows you to identify a device through a flash test: 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Grundlagen PROFINET Seite 19 Siemens AG © 2016
Übung 4: Vergabe der Teilnehmer 
IP-Adressen über das Tool PRONETA
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3.8.1.2. Exercise 2: Initializing the Network Components with the PROFINET Device Name using 
PRONETA 
 
Task 
With the help of the PRONETA tool, you are to assign a PROFINET device name to all network 
devices. You are free to use with the following information or choose your own: 
• S7-1513-1PN: s7-1513-plc 
• ET200SP: et200-io-device 
• TP700 Comfort: tp700-comfort-panel 
• SCALANCE XC208: scalance-xc208-switch 
• S7-1510SP-1PN : s7-1510sp-plc 
What to Do 
1. Initialize all network devices with the help of the PRONETA tool. 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of PROFINET Page 20 Siemens AG © 2016
Exercise 5: Initializing the Network Components 
with the PROFINET Device Name using PRONETA
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-15 
3.9. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to complete a topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of PROFINET Page 15 Siemens AG © 2016
Additional Information
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
3-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3.9.1. PI - PROFIBUS and PROFINET International 
 
PROFIBUS & PROFINET International 
27 Regional PI Associations (RPAs) are members in this international umbrella organization. One 
of them is the PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V. (PNO). The goal of the PNO as well as the 
other Regional PI Associations is to promote the technology’s advancement as well as the 
international propagation of the open and standardized technologies PROFIBUS and PROFINET. 
On the PI Homepage, you can get information and can download free-of-charge a variety of 
documents such as directives, profiles, presentations, brochures, software etc. 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Basics of PROFINET Page 16 Siemens AG © 2016
PI - PROFIBUS and PROFINET International 
Industrial Communication,PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Basics of PROFINET 
Training Document, V15.01.00 3-17 
3.9.2. Primary Setup Tool – PST 
 
PST – Primary Setup Tool 
The Primary Setup Tool, short PST, is a software provided by Siemens free of charge. With the 
help of the PST, network components, Ethernet CPs, controllers, IO-Devices can be carried out 
for SIMATIC NET. As well, address assignments such as the assignment of IP addresses or the 
initialization with a PROFINET device name can be carried out for network transitions. 
The PST does not require any other software packages or licenses for this functionality. The only 
requirement is that these SIMATIC NET devices have a preset ETHERNET (MAC) address and 
are accessible online in the network. 
If the SIMATIC NET module should have an integrated Web Based Management, this can be 
called directly in the PST via the button: “Start the browser for configuring INC modules ”. 
Note 
You will find further information on the various versions of the Primary Setup Tool on the Service 
& Support pages under the Entry ID number: 19440762. Furthermore, you can also download the 
various versions of the Primary Setup Tool from this Entry ID number. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Basics of PROFINET
Primary Setup Tool – PST 
Browse
IP address
Download
Mac address
Device name
Entry ID: 19440762
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-1 
 
Contents 4 
 
 
 
 
 
4. Network Components ............................................................................................ 4-2 
4.1. System Configurations over the Course of Time .................................................................. 4-3 
4.2. Basic Structures of the Network Topology ............................................................................ 4-4 
4.3. Conceptual Design Information ............................................................................................. 4-6 
4.4. Network Components ........................................................................................................... 4-7 
4.5. Cable Categories for Twisted-Pair Cables ............................................................................ 4-8 
4.6. FastConnect ........................................................................................................................ 4-10 
4.7. Task Description: Cabling with FastConnect ...................................................................... 4-11 
4.7.1. Exercise 1: Stripping with the Help of the Stripping Tool .................................................... 4-12 
4.7.2. Exercise 2: Assembling the IE Cable .................................................................................. 4-13 
4.8. Optical Cabling and Connecting Methods .......................................................................... 4-14 
4.9. Active Industrial Ethernet Components .............................................................................. 4-15 
4.10. Industrial Wireless LAN Components ................................................................................. 4-16 
4.11. Communication Processors (CPs) for IE ............................................................................ 4-18 
4.12. TIA Selection Tool ............................................................................................................... 4-19 
4.13. Task Description: Reading-out the Firmware of the Devices & Configuration of the System in 
the TIA Selection Tool ......................................................................................................... 4-20 
4.13.1. Exercise 3: Reading-out the Firmware of the Devices (TIA Portal) .................................... 4-21 
4.13.2. Exercise 4: Configuration of the System in the TIA Selection Tool .................................... 4-22 
4.14. Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 4-23 
4.14.1. Versions of IE FC RJ45 Plugs ............................................................................................ 4-24 
4.14.2. Industrial Ethernet FC Modular Outlet RJ45 ....................................................................... 4-25 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4. Network Components 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Network Components Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... have a basic overview of the plant configurations
... know the various network topologies
... be familiar with network components
... know and understand the difference between active and passive 
network components
... understand the FastConnect concept 
... know the TIA Selection Tool and be able to use it to configure his 
network configuration
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-3 
4.1. System Configurations over the Course of Time 
 
System Configurations 
The demands on industrial systems in automation have kept evolving and increasing over the 
years. As a result, technology and the technical possibilities have also been further developing. 
In the beginning, without fieldbuses, system components were wired centrally to the controllers 
and managed. With the establishment of fieldbus systems, came the first shift into industrial 
automation. This saved cabling effort, installation time and cost. However, this also had a more 
complex wiring of the system as a consequence. PROFIBUS, in particular, asserted itself here. 
Since the Internet and thus also Ethernet components have become more and more common 
and accepted in everyday life, the next step into industry was only a question of time. This was 
then taken with Industrial Ethernet and PROFINET. Everyday Ethernet components were made 
compatible for industrial use and so found their way into automation. 
Distributed networks with switches and routers, the connection to the office world as well as 
Industrial Security or even IWLAN are today a part of everyday life and are an integral part of 
automation. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
System Configurations over the Course of Time
Central Not Central Distributed
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.2. Basic Structures of the Network Topology 
 
Network Topologies 
Network topologies are oriented toward the requirements of the devices to be networked. The 
most common topologies include Line, Star and Ring structures. In reality, most systems consist 
of mixed structures. These can be implemented with both electrical cables and with optical cables 
(fiber optic cables). 
Line 
The line is the simplest network structure. It is characterized by the "backbone" of the network to 
which the individual devices are connected either directly or via individual branches whereby 
each branch only contains one device. 
The advantage of the line topology is the easy construction which only requires limited hardware 
investment. It is suitable, for example, for the large-scale networking of rigidly coupled machines 
like in a production line. 
Disadvantages of the line topology are that the resources are not fully utilized and that there is a 
lack of redundancy: a break in the line at one location cannot be bridged. 
A further limitation for networks with line structure is the physical arrangement of the network 
devices. Depending on their position, the backbone must potentially be laid the long way around 
which in turn can lead to problematic telegram runtimes. Line structuresare typically designed 
with devices with two integrated network interfaces. 
Ring 
If the two ends of a line are connected by means of an additional connection, a ring structure is 
created. The switches interconnected into a ring do not have to be exclusively connected with 
fiber optic or electrical cables. A mixed electro-optical ring is also allowed. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Basic Structures of the Network Topology
Line TreeStar
Ring
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-5 
A ring topology without a special redundancy mechanism is not possible! This would lead to the 
complete failure of the network. The special redundancy mechanism ensures that the ring 
structure normally remains a logical line and consequently no telegrams go around in circles. 
When a ring section fails, the mechanism makes it possible for an alternate route to be quickly 
available in the ring: instead of via the direct, now interrupted route, the message goes via the 
long, intact network section and reaches its recipient "indirectly". The network does not 
disintegrate into two segments. 
Star 
The star topology differs from the line in that a switch acts as the "center" of a network from which 
the cables branch to the individual end devices. The connection between the individual devices 
thus no longer occurs directly but indirectly via the switch. 
The immediate effect of this topology is that the messages no longer have to take “detours” via 
other devices but are purposefully sent from the switch to the recipient. This means that the 
network performance increases significantly since all devices of the star can communicate 
simultaneously. In addition to the network performance, the reliability also increases. Should a 
cable to a device fail, all other network components remain unaffected by it. 
Tree 
If several star topologies are connected with one another, this is called a tree topology. Typically, 
these star structures are then aligned hierarchically. 
Larger networks have this structure, especially when several topologies are combined with one 
another. In most cases, a higher-level network element, either a coupler element or another 
topology, forms the root. From there, a trunk with many branches is formed. 
Intermeshed Topology 
Intermeshed networks are when network components are linked multiple times. The network is 
fully intermeshed when each component is connected with every other component. This topology 
is usually used in an office but it is also used in industry for special cases such as energy 
transportation. However, this topology cannot be implemented without a special protocol. 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.3. Conceptual Design Information 
 
Conceptual Design Information 
When planning and wiring network components certain framework conditions have to be taken 
into account. These are not ‘must’ obligations but are useful information on how to increase the 
performance and the availability of the devices: 
• Devices that have a high communication load should not be put at the end of line 
structures. 
• If line structures are planned, the increased failure risk must be taken into account and 
must be considered in the plans. 
• Due to their high data traffic, CPUs should always be connected to central switches. 
• Use firewalls when integrating networks into higher-level networks or when connecting to 
the Internet. Topic: Security 
• Avoid bottlenecks when designing the network 
• Configure networks in as structured a manner as possible 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 5
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Conceptual Design Information
Communication 
bottleneck
Structure networks logically!
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-7 
4.4. Network Components 
 
Network Components 
Industrial Ethernet networks can contain two types of network components. These network 
components are divided into active and passive components. 
Passive Components 
Network components which do not have an active influence on the signal are classified as 
passive components. Normally, all connection technology components such as plugs, 
connectors, cables, etc. fall into this category. 
A listing of all passive components can be found in the Industry Online Support pages under the 
Entry ID: 84922825. 
Active Components 
Network components which actively influence the signal in the network are classified in the 
category of active components. This can be a signal processing or even the rejection of a 
telegram. Examples of active components are switches, access points, repeaters, media 
converters or even Link modules. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Network Components
Passive Components Active Components
Forward a signal without actively 
influencing it
Influence the signal
ID: 84922825
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.5. Cable Categories for Twisted-Pair Cables 
 
Categories for Twisted-Pair Cables 
According to EIA/TIA-568, ISO/IEC-11801, EN50173 and EN 50288-x-x, TP cables are divided 
into different categories or levels. They specify the electrical minimum requirements for the cable 
and essentially specify the maximum permissible transmission frequency. Currently the 
Categories 1 to 7 are defined. The permissible transmission frequency increases with the cable 
category. A Twisted-Pair cable of a certain category complies with the requirements of the 
respective category and with those categories below that. 
Category 1 (CAT1) 
Category 1 cables are designed for voice transmission in telephony and for data transmission at a 
low transmission frequency of less than 1MHz. Nowadays, such cable is no longer used. 
Category 2 (CAT2) 
CAT2 cables are designed for transmission frequencies of up to 4MHz. Such cable types were 
frequently used for house cabling such as for ISDN. 
Category 3 (CAT3) 
A CAT3 cable is designed for a transmission frequency of up to 10MHz and so permits a 
transmission speed of up to 10Mbit/s and a maximum cable length of 100m. Nowadays, such 
cable types really no longer find a use in the LAN area. 
Category 4 (CAT4) 
Cables of the CAT4 cable type are designed for transmission frequencies of up to 20MHz and 
transmission speeds of up to 16Mbit/s. These were frequently used in Token Ring networks. 
Category 5 (CAT5) 
Transmission frequencies up to 100MHz are specified in Category 5. Here, transmission speeds 
of up to 100Mbit/s are possible. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 8
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Cable Categories for Twisted-Pair Cables
The Category (CAT) specifies for which 
transmission speed and which maximum length 
a cable designed 
Category Transmission speed
CAT1 ---
CAT2 ---
CAT3 10MBit/s
CAT4 16MBit/s
CAT5 100MBit/s
CAT5e 1GBit/s
CAT6 1GBit/s
CAT6a 10GBit/s
CAT6e 10GBit/s
CAT7 10GBit/s
CAT8 40GBit/s
Still in the 
development stage
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-9 
Category 5e (CAT5e) 
As far as the quality of the cable is concerned, there is no difference between Category 5 and 
Category 5e. So that a cable fulfills the conditions for Category 5e, more rigorous acceptance 
measurements are however necessary. These measurements are defined through the 
ANSO/TIA/EIA-TSB-67 standard. If these criteria are fulfilled, a CAT5e cable is also authorized 
for the operation of 1000BASE-T, that is, 1GBit/s. 
Category 6 (CAT6) 
Cables of the CAT6cable type are designed for transmission frequencies of up to 250MHz and 
transmission speeds of 1GBit/s. Category 6 is extended by the two sub-categories 6a and 6e. 
Category 6a (CAT6a) 
The “a” for Category 6a cable types stands for “augmented”, that is, improved. Such cables are 
specified for transmission frequencies of up to 625MHz and thus permit transmission speeds of 
up to 10GBit/s and cable lengths of up to 100m. 
Category 6e (CAT6e) 
Cables of the CAT6e cable type permit frequencies of a maximum of 500MHz and a maximum 
length of 55m for a transmission speed of 10GBit/s. 
Category 7 (CAT7) 
For Category 7 cables, transmission frequencies of up to 600MHz are permitted and a 
transmission speed of up to 10GBit/s. Since, however, the requirements for shielding are very 
high in Category 7, this not only has an impact on the cable itself but also on the connector 
technology and the assembly of these. Category 7 connectors must fulfill either the IEC 60603-7-
7 standard or the IEC 61076-3-104 standard. 
Category 8 (CAT8) 
In Category 8, a transmission rate of 40GBit/s and a maximum frequency of 2000MHz is planned. 
However, this specification is currently still in the planning stages. 
Note 
The specific cabling of industrial plants is defined in the IEC 61918 standard and the structured 
cabling of industrial buildings is defined in the ISO/IEC 24702 standard. 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.6. FastConnect 
 
FastConnect 
FastConnect is a cabling system consisting of cables, plugs and tools for PROFIBUS and 
Industrial Ethernet/PROFINET networks, available for copper and glass fiber optic cables for on-
site assembly. 
FastConnect can be assembled quickly and easily on-site. As a result, the RJ45 cabling 
technology, as an existing standard, is also available as an industry-suitable design. 
IE FC RJ45 Plugs 
The IE FC RJ45 plugs are compact and rugged connectors. They have a rugged, industry-
suitable metallic enclosure which protects the data communication against interference. The 
plugs conform to the EN 50173 (RJ45) and ISO/ IEC 11801 standards. 
IE FC TP Cable 
The FastConnect (FC) Twisted Pair (TP) cables are shielded, radial symmetrically designed 
cables with 100 Ohms surge impedance. 
The combination of twisting the wires, foil shield and braided shield make the FC cables 
particularly suitable for installation in an electromagnetic industrial environment. The design also 
guarantees great stability of the electrical and mechanical data in the installed state. 
With the IE FC Stripping Tool, it is possible to remove the correct length of outer sheath and 
shield of the FC TP cables in one go. 
Stripping Tool 
With the Industrial Ethernet FastConnect (IE FC) Stripping Tool, the correct length of outer sheath 
and shield can be removed from Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cables. The IE FC cable 
prepared this way is connected to the plug or the outlet via cutting/clamping contacts. For the IE 
FC Stripping Tool there are two knife cassettes with different knife clearances. The IE FC 
Stripping Tool is delivered with a yellow knife cassette. 
Note 
The IE FC Stripping Tool may be used only for stripping SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet 
FastConnect cables. If the tool is used in any other manner, it can lead to accidents or the 
destruction of tool and cable. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 9
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
FastConnect
Stripping tool for IE 
FC cables
Special IE FC cable
IE FC RJ45 plug
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-11 
4.7. Task Description: Cabling with FastConnect 
 
Task Description 
You are to do a theoretical check of the Ethernet cabling of the training devices. In this context, 
you are to remove the insulation from an Ethernet cable and then assemble an RJ45 plug. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Network Components Page 10 Siemens AG © 2016
Task Description:
Cabling with FastConnect
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.7.1. Exercise 1: Stripping with the Help of the Stripping Tool 
 
Task 
You are to remove the insulation from a Siemens Industrial Ethernet FastConnect cable. 
What to Do 
1. Prepare the cable in such a way that you have a clean cut edge. 
2. Use the Stripping Tool to measure the required length for removing the insulation. 
3. Carry out the cable stripping as shown in the picture. 
4. Untwist the stripped cable. 
Note 
So that the insulation is cleanly removed from the cable, the knife cassette of the Stripping Tool 
must be adjusted. Use the Allen key provided for this. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 11
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Exercise 1: 
Stripping with the Help of the Stripping Tool
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-13 
4.7.2. Exercise 2: Assembling the IE Cable 
 
Task 
You are to assemble a FastConnect RJ45 plug using the cable you stripped in Exercise 1. 
What to Do 
1. Prepare the RJ45 plug assembly by imitating the color coding of the plug on the cable. 
2. Open the IE FC RJ45 plug. If necessary, use a suitable screwdriver. 
3. Carry out the assembly steps as shown in the picture. 
4. Close the IE FC RJ45 plug and test its functioning. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 12
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Exercise 2: Assembling the IE Cable
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.8. Optical Cabling and Connecting Methods 
 
Fiber Optic Cable 
For fiber optic cables, data transmission occurs through the modulation of electromagnetic waves 
in the range of visible and invisible light. 
High quality plastic and glass fiber optic is used. 
For Industrial Ethernet, there are different fiber optic cable types which offer tailored solutions for 
the various operating and ambient conditions for the connection of network components to one 
another. 
The following fiber optic cables are offered for Industrial Ethernet: 
• Glass fiber optic cable 
• PCF fiber optic cable 
• POF fiber optic cable 
Glass fiber optic cables are used for long distances. For short distances, plastic optical fiber such 
as Polymer Optic Fiber (POF) or plastic-coated glass fiber optic such as Polymer Cladded Fiber 
(PCF) are recommended. 
Some advantages of using fiber optic cables vis-à-vis electrical cables are: 
• Galvanic isolation of devices and segments 
• No potential equalization necessary 
• No shield currents 
• No influencing of the transmission paths through external electromagnetic interferences 
• No interfering transmissions along the transmission route 
• … 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 13
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Optical Cabling and Connecting Methods
Cables
▪ Plastic fiber optic cable (POF*/PCF*)
▪ Glass fiber optic cable according to IEC 60793, 60794
IP 20 plug-in connector
▪ SC RJ push/ pull plug for POF, PCF, Glass 
fiber optic cable
▪ SC push pull/ST plug for glass fiber optic cable
IP 65/67 plug-in connector
▪ Connector face compatible with IP20 version
▪ Push/ pull plug with integrated SC RJ plug
* POF = Polymer Optic Fiber
* PCF = Polymer Cladded Fiber
Fiber optic cable transmission technology according to IEC 8802-3
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-15 
4.9. Active Industrial Ethernet Components 
 
Active Industrial Ethernet Components 
Active Industrial Ethernet components are network components which have an active influence 
on the signal or the telegram.This includes stand-alone devices such as switches, media 
converters, link modules or even communication modules (CM) and communication processors 
(CP). 
Siemens Tools such as the TIA Selection Tool or the SIMATIC NET Selection Tool provide 
support for the selection of suitable components for the specific application. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Network Components Page 14 Siemens AG © 2016
Active Industrial Ethernet Components
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.10. Industrial Wireless LAN Components 
 
Industrial WLAN Components 
The SCALANCE W products can be subjected to fluctuations in the extended temperature range 
without coming into contact with dust and water. Rugged enclosures and mechanical protection 
against jolts and vibration enable the use in a harsh industrial environment. Even the accessories 
such as antennas, power supplies and cabling are part of this concept and are manufactured to 
industry standards. Energy and data are transmitted with Power-over-Ethernet via a cable and so 
save investment and maintenance costs. The removable media C-PLUG (Configuration Plug) 
stores project engineering and configuration data which enables a quick device exchange and 
without specially trained personnel. This minimizes downtimes and saves training costs. 
To protect against unauthorized access, the products provide modern standard mechanisms for 
user identification (Authentication) and data encryption and can simultaneously be integrated in 
existing safety concepts without a problem. 
With the international IEEE 802.11n standard, wireless communication via IWLAN is even more 
robust. The greatest advantage results from the use of multipath scattering (Multiple Input, 
Multiple Output (MIMO)). This allows the devices to use several antennas in parallel. In this way, 
a higher data rate is achieved and at the same time the susceptibility to interference in 
environments with many reflexions is reduced. 
Access Points 
The access points are the central base stations for infrastructure networks. They coordinate and 
control the wireless communication within a wireless (radio) cell. If two or more access points are 
located in one wireless network, that is, the same wireless network name (SSID), the client 
module can switch between the wireless cells which are formed by the individual access points 
(roaming). The wireless connection is thereby maintained. This method is used when the required 
wireless coverage is greater than the range of an access point. All access points can also be 
configured in such a way that their functionality is limited to that of a client. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Network Components Page 15 Siemens AG © 2016
Industrial Wireless LAN Components
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-17 
Client Modules 
The client modules of the SCALANCE W product line are used as a gateway from wireless to 
wired network segments (bridge function). Usually they communicate with an access point 
(infrastructure network). 
iFeatures 
With the help of a Key Plug, additional functionalities can be activated for special SCALANCE 
switches. For the 780s and 740s series, these additional functionalities include the so-called 
iFeatures such as iREF, iPCF, etc. 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.11. Communication Processors (CPs) for IE 
 
Communication Processors (CPs) / Communication Modules (CMs) 
Communication processors and communication modules expand the controller by a further 
interface. The maximum number of CPs and CMs which can be connected to a controller 
depends on their performance class. 
A CM or CP allows further networks to be connected to the controller. These, however, do not 
have to be connected to the networks of the internal interface of the PLC, but rather a stand-
alone operation of these networks can take place. 
CPs and CMs furthermore relieve the internal PLC processor of communication tasks and add 
further possible connections. Unlike CMs, CPs additionally expand the functionalities of the 
controller (Security, ISO, FTP,…). 
Both components are connected to the controller via the internal backplane bus. 
The exact properties of the respective CMs and CPs can be obtained from their device manuals 
which can be found on the Service and Support pages. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Communication Processors (CPs) for IE 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-19 
4.12. TIA Selection Tool 
 
TIA Selection Tool 
Both the active as well as the passive components must withstand harsher ambient conditions in 
the industrial environment than in the office world. This is noticeable in many ways! 
With the TIA Selection Tool you can select, configure and order devices for Totally Integrated 
Automation. It is the successor to the SIMATIC Selection Tool and combines already familiar 
configurators for automation in one tool. You can start it directly in the Siemens Industry Mall or 
download it as a file. 
The TIA Selection Tool provides you with wizards for selecting the desired devices and networks. 
As well, there are configurators for selecting modules and accessories as well as for checking the 
correct functioning. The TIA Selection Tool generates a complete order list from your product 
selection or product configuration. You can export this directly into the Industry Mall or the CA 01 
shopping cart. 
With the TIA Selection Tool, you can select and configure the SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC ET 200, 
SIMATIC HMI Panels, SIMATIC IPC, SIMATIC HMI Software and Industrial Communication 
components. Beyond that, you can create PROFIBUS and PROFINET networks, configure their 
topology as well as select associated cables and connectors. 
Further information on the TIA Selection Tool can be found via the following link: 
http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/de/simatic/tia-selection-tool/Seiten/tab.aspx 
The TIA Selection Tool can be started directly online via the following link: 
https://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool/start 
SIMATIC NET Selection Tool 
The SIMATIC NET Selection Tool is a slimmed down version of the TIA Selection Tool which only 
deals with industrial communication and only has Industrial Ethernet components for selection. 
More information on the SIMATIC NET Selection Tool can be found on the Service and Support 
pages under the following Entry ID: 39134641 
The SIMATIC NET Selection Tool can also be started directly online via the following link: 
http://www.siemens.de/snst 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
TIA Selection Tool
http://w3.siemens.com/mcms/topics/de/simatic/tia-selection-tool/Seiten/tab.aspx
https://www.siemens.com/tia-selection-tool/start
http://www.siemens.de/snst
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-20 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.13. Task Description: Reading-out the Firmware of the Devices & 
Configuration of the System in the TIA Selection Tool 
 
Task Description 
Since all network components have an IP address which is located in the same subnet as our 
Field-PG, the firmware of all devices can be read out. This is required afterwards in order to 
configure the system in the TIA Selection Tool. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 18
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Task Description: Reading-out the Firmware of the Devices & 
Configuration of the System in the TIA Selection Tool
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document,V15.01.00 4-21 
4.13.1. Exercise 3: Reading-out the Firmware of the Devices (TIA Portal) 
 
Task 
With the help of the TIA Portal, you are to read-out the firmware of all accessible devices. This is 
best done via the ‘Online access’ and from there via the accessible devices. 
What to Do 
1. Display all connected devices via the function “Update accessible devices” in the ‘Online 
access’ tab. 
2. The firmware of the network components can be obtained via Online & diagnostics and there 
in the menu item “General” which is located under Diagnostics (see picture). 
3. Determine the firmware of the S7-1513-1PN:__________________________ 
4. Determine the firmware of the ET200SP:_____________________________ 
5. Determine the firmware of the SCALANCEX208:_______________________ 
6. Determine the firmware of the S7-1510SP-1PN:________________________ 
Note 
For this task, you still don’t need a project! 
The firmware of a module can only be read out if the module has an IP address and this IP 
address has the same network address as the device through which the firmware is to be read 
out with the help of the TIA Portal. 
Example: 
S7-1513-1PN: IP address: 192.168.222.1 // Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 
 Network address: 192.168.222.0 
Field PG: IP address: 192.168.222.250 // Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0 
 Network address: 192.168.222.0 
Reading out the firmware via the TIA Portal would be possible in this case! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 19
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Exercise 3: Reading-out the 
Firmware of the Devices (TIA Portal)
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-22 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.13.2. Exercise 4: Configuration of the System in the TIA Selection Tool 
 
Task 
You are to create the hardware configuration of your system in the TIA Selection Tool. You are 
then to network the devices in the Network view and assign the ET200SP to the correct IO-
Controller. 
What to Do 
1. Open the TIA Selection Tool. 
2. Create the setpoint configuration of the system so that it matches your actual configuration. 
3. Supplement your programming device. 
4. Network the devices according to your wiring. 
5. Assign the ET200SP IO-Device to the correct IO-Controller. 
6. Save the TIA Selection Tool project. 
7. Export your configuration. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 20
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Exercise 4: Configuration of the System 
in the TIA Selection Tool
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-23 
4.14. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to complete a topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Netzkomponenten Seite 21 Siemens AG © 2016
Wenn Sie noch mehr wissen wollen
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
4-24 Training Document, V15.01.00 
4.14.1. Versions of IE FC RJ45 Plugs 
 
IE FC RJ45 Plugs 
The IE FC RJ45 plugs are compact and rugged connectors. They have a rugged, industry-
suitable metallic enclosure which protects the data communication against interference. The 
plugs conform to the EN 50173 (RJ45) and ISO/ IEC 11801 standards. They are available in two 
pin versions. Once as the IE FC RJ45 plug in 2x2 version for Fast Ethernet cables with 4 wires 
and then the IE FC RJ45 plug in 4x2 version for Gigabit Ethernet cables with 8 wires. 
IE FC RJ45 Plug 2x2 
The IE FC RJ45 plug 2x2 is, for its part, available in three versions. These differ in the cable 
outlet of the plug: 
• With 180° (straight) cable outlet: 
Due to the design, the IE FC RJ45 Plug 180 can be used both on devices with single 
sockets as well as on devices with multiple sockets (blocks). The plug is suitable for 
connecting IE FC TP cables to SIMATIC NET modules and SCALANCE devices. 
• With 90° (angled) cable outlet: 
The plug is suitable for connecting IE FC TP cables to ET200 or PN/PN couplers. 
• With 145° (angled) cable outlet: 
The plug is suitable for connecting IE FC TP cables to SIMOTION and SINAMICS 
modules. 
IE FC RJ45 Plug 4x2 
The IE FC RJ45 plug 4x2 is only available in one version: 
• With 180° (straight) cable outlet: 
Through the plug, point-to-point connections (10 / 100 / 1000 Mbit/s) for Industrial 
Ethernet can be implemented between two terminals/ network components of up to 90 m 
without patch technology. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 22
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
Versions of IE FC RJ45 Plugs
IE FC RJ45 Plug 4x2
IE FC RJ45 Plug 145°
IE FC RJ45 Plug 4x2
IE FC RJ45 Plug 180° IE FC RJ45 Plug 90°
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Network Components 
Training Document, V15.01.00 4-25 
4.14.2. Industrial Ethernet FC Modular Outlet RJ45 
 
Industrial Ethernet FastConnect Modular Outlet RJ45 
The Industrial Ethernet FC Modular Outlet RJ45 serves the transition from the rugged Industrial 
Ethernet FC TP cables used in the industrial environment to pre-assembled TP Cord cables by 
means of an RJ45 socket. In combination with FC TP cables and pre-assembled TP Cords, the 
Industrial Ethernet FC Modular Outlet RJ45 ensures time-saving installations. A color coding 
prevents errors during wire insertion. The Industrial Ethernet FC Modular Outlet RJ45 
corresponds to Category 5 of the ISO/IEC 11801 and EN 50173 international cabling standards. 
Modular Outlet Basic Module 
The Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Modular Outlet basic module is available with three 
interchangeable inserts: 
• Insert 2 FE: 
Basic module with interchangeable insert for two Fast Ethernet connections for 
connecting two 10/100 Mbit/s terminals/network components. 
• Insert 1 GE: 
Basic module with interchangeable insert for one Gigabit Ethernet connection for 
connecting one 10/100/1000 Mbit/s terminal/network component. 
• Outlet Power Insert: 
Basic module with interchangeable insert for one power supply and one 10/100 Mbit/s 
terminal/network component. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 23
IK-TIAPN
Network Components
IE FC Modular Outlet RJ45
Insert 1x Gigabit EthernetInsert 2x Fast Ethernet Outlet Power Insert
IE FC Modular Outlet RJ45
Outlet open and 
wired
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-1 
 
Contents 5 
 
 
 
 
 
5. PROFINET Configuration ....................................................................................... 5-2 
5.1. Manual Commissioning of a PN IO-System ......................................................................... 5-3 
5.2. Manual Commissioning Sequence ....................................................................................... 5-5 
5.3. Name Assignment using the TIA Portal with Project ............................................................ 5-6 
5.3.1. Definition of the PROFINET Device Name in the Project ..................................................... 5-6 
5.3.2. Assigning the PROFINET Device Name via the Project ...................................................... 5-7 
5.3.3. Writing the PROFINET Device Name onto the MMC ........................................................... 5-8 
5.4. Name Assignment using the TIA Portal without Project ....................................................... 5-9 
5.5. Download the PROFINET-IO Configuration to the IO-Controller ....................................... 5-11 
5.6. Device Exchange without Programming Device ................................................................. 5-12 
5.7. Task Description: Commissioning the S7-1500 Case ........................................................ 5-13 
5.7.1. Exercise 1: Creating a Project ............................................................................................5-14 
5.7.2. Exercise 2: Configuring and Parameterizing the S7-1500 .................................................. 5-15 
5.7.3. Exercise 3: Creating a TP700 Comfort ............................................................................... 5-16 
5.7.4. Exercise 4: Configuring and Parameterizing the ET200SP ................................................ 5-17 
5.7.5. Exercise 5: Networking & Grouping the Devices ................................................................ 5-18 
5.7.6. Exercise 6: Inserting a Tag Table from the Library ............................................................. 5-19 
5.8. Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 5-21 
5.8.1. Device Number of an IO-Device ......................................................................................... 5-22 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5. PROFINET Configuration 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / PROFINET Configuration Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... be able to configure PROFINET-IO networks in the TIA Portal
... be able to assign parameters to an IO-Device
... understand the storing of PROFINET device names
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-3 
5.1. Manual Commissioning of a PN IO-System 
 
Manual Name Assignment for a PROFINET IO-System 
So that the individual devices are accessible during system startup of the IO-Controller, they are 
given device names. This is done during the manual commissioning of the PN IO-System by the 
IO-Supervisor. 
If the commissioning is done manually, it must however be kept in mind that the device names 
which are downloaded into the IO-Controller via the hardware configuration must match those 
which the IO-Supervisor assigns to the individual IO-Devices. That is, the device names which 
were assigned offline for the individual IO-Devices must match the online device names. This is 
comparable with the setting of the PROFIBUS address. If errors are made here, the IO-Device 
cannot be reached by the IO-Controller. 
The PROFINET name of a device must comply with the PROFINET name convention! 
 
PROFINET Name Convention 
The following lists the rules for the converted name. The hardware configuration checks whether 
the name conventions are complied with and, if necessary, corrects them. If the converted name 
is not to differ from the name of the module, then the name of the module must satisfy these 
rules: 
• The name is limited to a total of 128 characters (letters "a" to "z", numbers "0" to "9", 
hyphen or dot) 
• The name consists of one or more labels, which are to be separated by a dot ".". 
• A label within the device name, that is, a character string between two dots, may be a 
maximum of 63 characters. 
• No special characters such as vowel mutations, brackets, underscore, forward slash, 
blank etc. The hyphen is the only special character allowed. 
• No capital letters may be used in the device name. 
• The device name must not begin with the characters "-" or "." and it must not end with 
these characters. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Manual Commissioning of a PN IO-System
Load configuration 
onto IO-Controller
Namen zuweisen über 
TIA-Portal, C-Plug oder MMC
Namen zuweisen über 
TIA-Portal, C-Plug oder MMC
Namen zuweisen über 
TIA-Portal, C-Plug oder MMC
Assign name via 
TIA Portal, C-Plug or MMC
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
• The device name must not begin with numbers. 
• The device name must not begin with the character string "port-xyz-" (x, y, z = 0...9). 
• The device name must not have the format n.n.n.n (n = 0...999) 
Device names are assigned to the PROFINET IO devices in the commissioning phase. 
 
 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-5 
5.2. Manual Commissioning Sequence 
 
Manual Commissioning Sequence of a PROFINET IO-System 
The manual commissioning of a PROFINET IO-System can be divided into the following steps: 
• Delivered condition / Factory settings: 
The device is commissioned for the first time or it is reset to its factory settings. The 
device has no IP address and no device name. It can only be addressed via its MAC 
address. 
• Device name assignment: 
If the commissioning is done manually, the IO-Device can be assigned a device name in 
two ways. The device name can always be written in the IO-Device by the IO-Supervisor. 
For this, various software packages can be used (TIA Portal, PST-Tool, etc…). If the IO-
Device supports an MMC, the device name can also be written directly onto the card 
using the PG or using a PC with a connected USB prommer. 
• Downloading the PROFINET-IO configuration into the IO-Controller: 
After all devices have been assigned a device name either directly via the relevant tools 
or using the MMC card, the PN-IO configuration is downloaded into the IO-Controller. 
• IP addresses assignment: 
After the PN-IO configuration is downloaded into the IO-Controller, the controller 
searches for the PROFINET device names in the network during startup. As soon as one 
of these names has been found, the IO-Controller assigns the IP address stored in the 
configuration for this name. The IO-Controller and not the IO-Supervisor assigns the IP 
address to the IO-Device. 
Note 
If the IO-Supervisor writes the device name directly in the IO-Device and there is an MMC or a C-
Plug in the device at the time, the device name is stored on this medium and so permits a device 
exchange without programming device. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Manual Commissioning Sequence
Delivered condition / Factory settings
Device only has a MAC address
IO-Supervisor writes the device name in the IO-
DEVICE or on the MMC of the IO-Device
IO-Supervisor downloads the PROFINET-IO 
configuration into the IO-Controller
IO-Controller recognizes the 
IO-Device via the name and writes the IP address 
in this IO-Device during system startup
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5.3. Name Assignment using the TIA Portal with Project 
5.3.1. Definition of the PROFINET Device Name in the Project 
 
Name Assignment using the TIA Portal with Project 
The TIA Portal makes it possible to assign names to IO-Devices with or without a project. 
Definition of the PROFINET Device Name in the Project 
The user can define the PROFINET device name with the help of a project either in the Device 
view or in the Topology view in the Properties of the IO-Device. 
The PROFINET device name of a PROFINET device is either automatically generated or 
assigned manually by the user. If the option: “Generate PROFINET device name automatically” is 
activated, the PROFINET device name is derived from the general name of the device. If this is 
not the case, a name can be assigned here which differs from the general name. 
Activating or deactivating this function has no influence on the control and the compliance with 
the PROFINET name convention, however. This is always executed by the TIA Portal and the 
name assigned by the user is automatically corrected by the system in case of an error. 
Whether the name complies with the convention or not can be checked in the field: “Converted 
name”. If the converted name complies with the PROFINET device name, the PROFINET device 
name is defined accordingto the PROFINET name convention. This is a benefit for the user 
because he can immediately carry out the control of the name convention while defining the 
device name! 
Note 
The PROFINET device name must not have any capital letters. These are automatically 
converted into lowercase letters by the TIA Portal. Attention should be paid to this when assigning 
the device name. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 5
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Name Assignment using the TIA Portal with Project:
Definition of the PROFINET Device Name
Possible in Network view 
and Topology view
PROFINET device name is standard-compliant PROFINET device name is not standard-compliant
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-7 
5.3.2. Assigning the PROFINET Device Name via the Project 
 
Assigning the PROFINET Device Name via the Project 
The assignment of the name defined in the hardware configuration of the IO-Controller for the 
respective IO-Device can either be done in the Device view or in the Topology view. A right-click 
on the IO-Device calls the dialog “Assign device name”. 
In the dialog that now opens, the name stored in the hardware configuration can be assigned to 
the selected IO-Device. This PROFINET device name can no longer be changed in this step! The 
advantage of this method is that the PROFINET device name which the IO-Controller searches 
for during its startup always matches the device name which is loaded on the IO-Device! 
Note 
A right-click on the PROFINET IO-System also calls the dialog “Assign device name”. The 
difference here to the execution on the IO-Device is that now the PROFINET device name which 
is to be assigned can be selected via a selection window. That is, all available PROFINET-IO 
Device names are displayed for selection which now can be assigned successively. 
For the assignment of several IO-Devices, this is in particular a considerable reduction in 
workload! 
 
If an MMC or a C-Plug is inserted in the IO-Device while the PROFINET device name is being 
written to the device, the device name is written onto the MMC / C-Plug and is lost on the device 
when the MMC / C-Plug is pulled! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 6
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Name Assignment using the TIA Portal with Project:
Assigning the Device Name
Writes the name directly in 
the IO-Device
Possible in Network view 
and Topology view
Name cannot be changed
Found IO-Device of the 
same type
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5.3.3. Writing the PROFINET Device Name onto the MMC 
 
Writing the PROFINET Device Name onto the MMC 
If a Micro Memory Card is inserted in the PG or the USB prommer, the PROFINET device name 
can also be written directly onto the MMC and then inserted into the IO-Device. The IO-Device 
then adopts the PROFINET device name during its startup. 
This function can be executed both in the Device view and the Topology view by right-clicking on 
the IO-Device. 
Note 
The function “Write IO-Device name to Micro Memory Card” is only displayed if the IO-Device 
supports this function! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Name Assignment using the TIA Portal with Project:
Writing the Device Name onto the MMC
MMC must be 
inserted in the PG/PC
Possible in Network 
view and Topology view
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-9 
5.4. Name Assignment using the TIA Portal without Project 
 
Name Assignment using the TIA Portal without Project 
With the help of the TIA Portal, every IO-Device can be assigned a PROFINET device name. For 
this, no additional software and also no project is required. 
The user can search for all accessible devices using the ‘Online access’. Then, the IO-Device to 
be initialized is selected and the function: “Online & diagnostics” is called. Here, in the “Functions” 
tab and the “Assign name” menu item, the IO-Device can be assigned a PROFINET device 
name. However, it must be noted here that the user must enter the name himself. If this name 
later does not match the name that is loaded into the IO-Controller, the IO-Controller will not be 
able to find this IO-Device. 
 
Note 
The IO-Device does not require an IP address to execute the “Assign name” function! However, it 
must be noted that to identify the IO-Device with the help of the TIA Portal, the following 
requirements must be fulfilled: 
• The IO-Device must be assigned an IP address. 
• The IP address of the IO-Device must be located in the same subnet as the PG or the 
PC on which the TIA Portal is installed. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 8
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Name Assignment using the TIA Portal without Project:
Defining and Assigning the Device Name
Select the desired IO-Device
via the interface
Manually assign device name
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
If these requirements are fulfilled, the IO-Device is presented in the “General” tab as follows: 
 
If these are not fulfilled, this presentation is as shown: 
 
With the help of the TIA Portal, a temporary IP address can be assigned to every IO-Device! 
 
 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-11 
5.5. Download the PROFINET-IO Configuration to the IO-Controller 
 
Downloading the PROFINET-IO Configuration 
After all IO-Devices have been assigned a PROFINET device name, the PROFINET-IO 
configuration must finally still be downloaded to the IO-Controller. This is executed by 
downloading the hardware configuration into the IO-Controller. In the HW-Config, all device 
names of the IO-Devices are stored which are assigned to this IO-Controller. Then during its 
startup phase, the IO-Controller searches for the PROFINET device names. It assigns the 
PROFINET-IO configuration which is stored in the hardware configuration to the corresponding 
IO-Device names. 
Configuration Time for an IO-Device 
In the hardware configuration of the IO-Controller, you can define in the menu item: “Startup” the 
maximum time the IO-Controller is to try to configure (parameterize) the IO-Device. The default 
setting for this option is 60 seconds. The IO-Controller will try for 60 seconds to configure 
(parameterize) each IO-Device. 
Note 
If, after downloading the hardware configuration using the TIA Portal, the option: “Start all” is 
selected, the IO-Device cannot be configured by the IO-Controller. The TIA Portal cannot be 
addressed for the set configuration time! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 9
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Downloading the PROFINET-IO 
Configuration to the IO-Controller
PROFINET-IO configuration is 
downloaded via the HW-Config
Maximum configuration time for 
each IO-Device
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5.6. Device Exchange without Programming Device 
 
Device Exchange without Programming Unit 
As previously mentioned, there are PROFINET-IO Devices which support an MMC or a C-Plug. 
These make the function: “Device replacement without programming device” possible in the 
PROFINET-IO System. 
Since, for an IO-Device with an MMC or a C-Plug, the PROFINET device name is not written in 
the internal memory of this IO-Device, the MMC or the C-Plug can simply be removed from the 
defective device and inserted in the exchange IO-Device when a device fails. The new IO-Device 
is automatically initialized with the PROFINETdevice name of the defective device and the 
PROFINET-IO System continues running without an error. 
Premise for this of course is that the new IO-Device has the same configuration as the defective 
IO-Device. 
Note 
The removable media, that is, the MMC or the C-Plug, must be purchased separately! 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 10
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Device Exchange without Programming Device
Removable media MMC Removable media C-Plug
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-13 
5.7. Task Description: Commissioning the S7-1500 Case 
 
Task Description 
You are to commission the 1500 case. You are to create the hardware configuration of the 
different devices and parameterize the individual modules. Then you are to network them and 
load the individual devices with the information from the project. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / PROFINET Configuration Page 11 Siemens AG © 2016
Task Description:
Creating a Project + Commissioning the 1500 Case
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5.7.1. Exercise 1: Creating a Project 
 
Task 
You are to create a new TIA Portal project in which you will solve most of the following tasks. You 
can decide what name you wish to give your project and also where you want to store it! 
What to Do 
1. Open the TIA Portal. 
2. In either the Project view or in the Portal view, create a new project. The name assignment is 
you choice. You can define the storage location anywhere on D-drive. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / PROFINET Configuration Page 12 Siemens AG © 2016
Exercise 1: Creating a Project
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-15 
5.7.2. Exercise 2: Configuring and Parameterizing the S7-1500 
 
Task 
You are to configure and parameterize the S7-1500. The digital input and output modules are to 
be given the addresses from 0-3 and the analog input module is to be given the range from 44-
59. 
The S7-1500 gets the IP address 192.168.222.13 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. The 
device name is: “1513-io-controller”. 
What to Do 
1. Add an unspecified S7-1500 to your project. 
2. Detect the configuration of the connected S7-1500. 
3. Adjust the I/O addresses of the modules according to the picture and the task. 
4. Assign the IP address 192.168.222.13 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. 
5. The CPU gets the name: 1513-io-controller. 
6. Save your project. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 13
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Exercise 2: 
Configuring and Parameterizing the S7-1500
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5.7.3. Exercise 3: Creating a TP700 Comfort 
 
Task 
You are to create a new Comfort Panel TP700 Comfort. This Panel does not have to have any 
content but must simply exist in the project. The Panel gets the IP address 192.168.222.70 with 
the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. The device name for the Panel is “touch-me”. 
What to Do 
1. Insert a new TP700 Comfort in your project. 
2. Set the interface of the Panel to the IP address 192.168.222.70 with the subnet mask 
255.255.255.0. 
3. Name the Panel “touch-me”. 
4. Save your project. 
5. Download the Panel with your changes. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 14
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Exercise 3: Creating a TP700 Comfort
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-17 
5.7.4. Exercise 4: Configuring and Parameterizing the ET200SP 
 
Task 
In your project, you are to generate an ET200SP and configure as well as parameterize it. The 
digital inputs and outputs are to be in the address range of 4-5, the analog I/Os get the range 6-
13. The ET200SP is assigned the IP address 192.168.222.200 with the subnet mask 
255.255.255.0. The PROFINET device name for the IO-Device is “et200sp-io-device”. After the 
configuration and parameterization, assign this name to the Online-Device. The initial generation 
of the ET 200SP occurs via the Hardware detection. Subsequently, the configuration and 
parameterization still has to be completed. 
What to Do 
1. Generate a new ET 200SP. For this, use the menu command: "Hardware detection / IO 
devices" in the "Online" menu in the menu bar of TIA Portal. 
2. If necessary, carry out changes in the parameterization of the ET 200SP that still have to be 
made according to the task. 
3. Assign the IP address 192.168.222.200 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the IO-
Device. 
4. Offline in the Hardware Configuration rename the ET 200SP "et200sp-io-device". 
5. Go into the Properties of the “AI 4xU/I 2-wire ST” module and adjust the potential group to 
“Enable new potential group (light BaseUnit)”. 
6. Save your project. 
7. Assign the Online-Device the device name just configured. 
Note 
The modules can only be parameterized after the devices have been networked. Therefore, work 
through the following exercise and then return to this exercise! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 15
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Exercise 4: 
Configuring and Parameterizing the ET200SP
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5.7.5. Exercise 5: Networking & Grouping the Devices 
 
Task 
You are to network all devices in the Network view and check the settings such as IP address 
and device name. With the networking, a PROFINET IO-System between the ET200SP and the 
S7-1500 is to result. 
Finally, you are still to group the devices in the TIA Portal Project tree. For this, you are to create 
a group with the name: "1513Case". 
What to Do 
1. Switch to the “Network view” in your project. 
2. Network the individual devices one below the other. 
3. Check the IO-System between S7-1500 and ET200SP. The ET200SP must be assigned to 
the S7-1500 as an IO-Device. 
4. Then parameterize the I/O addresses of the ET200SP according to the task from the previous 
exercise. 
5. Check the IP addresses of the individual modules as well as their device names. 
6. Also check whether the option: “Generate PROFINET device name automatically” is activated 
for each PROFINET interface: 
 
7. In your Project tree, create a new group with the name "1513Case". Then, assign the S7-
1500, the ET 200SP as well as the TP700 to this group. 
8. Save your project. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Exercise 5: Networking & grouping the Devices
Name: 1513-io-controller
IP: 192.168.222.13
Name: touch-me
IP: 192.168.222.70
Name: et200sp-io-device
IP: 192.168.222.200
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Network address: 192.168.222.0
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-19 
5.7.6. Exercise 6: Inserting a Tag Table from the Library 
 
Task 
You are to insert the prefabricated tag table from the “IK-TIAPN” library into your project. The 
library can either be opened immediately or it must first still be retrieved. In this case, retrieve the 
library in the same folder as the archive file is located. 
You will find the library under the following path on your computer: 
C:\Archives\TIA_Portal\IK-TIAPN 
 
What to Do 
1. Open or retrieve (unzip) the library. 
2. Open the Chapter5 (folder) of the IK-TIAPN library and, using drag & drop, drag the 
“1513CaseVariables” into your project under “PLC tags”. 
3. Save your project. 
4. Load the controller. 
5. All modules should now have the status OK, that is, show agreen light. If this is not the case, 
check your configuration of the modules. 
 
 
 
 
Note 
 Since you are working with a fail-safe CPU here, you must set the “Full access incl. fail-safe 
(no protection)”. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
PROFINET Configuration
Exercise 6: 
Inserting a Tag Table from the Library
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-20 Training Document, V15.01.00 
 
 
Note 
 If the offline configured access node of the PLC is not located in the subnet of the physical 
device, TIA Portal will automatically query whether you are assigning an IP address in the 
address range 192.168.x.241 to 192.168.x.250 of the network card. 
 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
Training Document, V15.01.00 5-21 
5.8. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to complete a topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / PROFINET Projektierung Seite 18 Siemens AG © 2016
Wenn Sie noch mehr wissen wollen
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – PROFINET Configuration 
5-22 Training Document, V15.01.00 
5.8.1. Device Number of an IO-Device 
 
Device Number of an IO-Device 
The device number of an IO-Device is automatically assigned by the TIA Portal when an IO-
Device is created. The device number must be unique in the PROFINET I/O-System, but it can 
still be manually adjusted later on. The device number of the IO-Controller is always ‘0’ and 
cannot be manually changed. 
Various instructions require the device number and not the device name or the geographic 
address of a module in order to be able to address it. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / PROFINET Configuration Page 19 Siemens AG © 2016
Device Number of an IO-Device
wird bei einigen 
Anweisungen benötigt
Is required for some
instructions
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-1 
 
Contents 6 
 
 
 
 
 
6. Topology Editor ...................................................................................................... 6-2 
6.1. Automatic Commissioning of a PN IO-System ..................................................................... 6-3 
6.2. Automatic Commissioning Sequence ................................................................................... 6-4 
6.3. The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) ........................................................................... 6-5 
6.4. Basics of LLDP...................................................................................................................... 6-6 
6.5. Topology Detection with the Help of the LLDP ..................................................................... 6-7 
6.5.1. Structure of a PROFINET IO System ................................................................................... 6-7 
6.5.2. Downloading the Configuration to the IO-Controller ............................................................. 6-8 
6.5.3. Name Information is Distributed via LLDP ............................................................................ 6-9 
6.5.4. IO-Controller assigns further Device Names ...................................................................... 6-10 
6.6. Adjusting the Topology View to the Network View ............................................................. 6-11 
6.7. Creating the Setpoint Topology .......................................................................................... 6-12 
6.8. Downloading the Setpoint Topology into the IO-Controller ................................................ 6-14 
6.9. Task Description: Creating the Setpoint Topology ............................................................. 6-15 
6.9.1. Exercise 1: Creating the Setpoint Topology of the 1500 Case ........................................... 6-16 
6.10. Detecting the Actual Topology of a PN IO-System ............................................................. 6-17 
6.11. Offline/Online Comparison of the Topology ........................................................................ 6-18 
6.12. Device Replacement without Exchangeable Medium......................................................... 6-20 
6.13. Overwriting the PROFINET Device Name .......................................................................... 6-21 
6.14. Task Description: Detecting the Remaining Topology of the System and Testing the 
Automatic Commissioning .................................................................................................. 6-22 
6.14.1. Exercise 2: Configuration & Parameterization of the Missing Devices (Scalance + ET 200SP 
PLC) .................................................................................................................................... 6-23 
6.14.2. Exercise 3: Detecting the Actual Topology ......................................................................... 6-25 
6.14.3. Exercise 4: Activating a Device Replacement without Exchangeable Medium .................. 6-26 
6.14.4. Exercise 5: Permit Overwriting the Device Names ............................................................. 6-28 
6.15. Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 6-29 
6.15.1. Device Replacement without Topological Configuration .................................................... 6-30 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6. Topology Editor 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Topology Editor Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... understand the automatic commissioning of a PROFINET I/O-
System based on a Setpoint (Preset) Topology and be able to apply 
it
... be familiar with the device exchange without removable media
... be familiar with the function “Overwriting the PROFINET device 
name” 
... be able to carry out a comparison of the online to the offline 
topology
... understand for what the LLDP is required
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-3 
6.1. Automatic Commissioning of a PN IO-System 
 
Automatic Commissioning of a PROFINET IO-System 
The function “Automatic commissioning of a PROFINET IO-System” is based on the LLDP (Link 
Layer Discovery Protocol). 
This function is beneficial especially for the commissioning of multiple machines of the same type with 
the same configuration and setpoint (preset) topology: The expenditure of time and the possible 
causes of errors during commissioning are minimized. 
With this function, the IP address and device name assignment of the PROFINET IO-Devices occurs 
automatically through the respective PROFINET IO-Controller, without a removable media (e.g. Micro 
Memory Card) with stored device name or a programming device (PG) being necessary. 
So that the automatic commissioning of a PROFINET IO System can be executed by the IO-
Controller, the following requirements must be fulfilled: 
• The IO-Controller and the IO-Devices must support the PROFINET functionality “…device 
replacement without exchangeable medium/PG”. 
• The devices must be reset to the delivered condition (factory settings) (normally!). 
• The topology of the PROFINET IO System with the IO-Devices concerned must be 
configured. 
• The configured setpoint topology must match the actual topology. 
Note 
The topology of the PROFINET IO System is configured offline. With this setpoint topology, the 
PROFINET IO-Controller is made familiar with the ‘neighborhood’ relationships of all PROFINET IO-
Devices foundin the PROFINET IO- System. 
On the Service & Support pages, you will find further information on the function “Device exchange 
without exchangeable medium” under the Entry ID number: 36752540 and you will be able to check 
which devices support this functionality. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Automatic Commissioning of a PN IO-System
Download topology 
to the IO-Controller
IO-Controller assigns 
names to IO-Devices
Create the topology of 
the PN IO-System
ID: 36752540
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.2. Automatic Commissioning Sequence 
 
Automatic Commissioning Sequence 
The automatic commissioning of a PROFINET IO system can be divided into individual steps: 
• Creation of the setpoint topology: 
The setpoint topology must be created by the IO-Supervisor. So that the automatic 
commissioning of the PROFINET IO system can occur later on without errors, it must 
match the actual topology. 
• Loading the IO-Controller: 
After the setpoint topology is created, it must be downloaded into the IO-Controller. With 
the help of the setpoint topology, the controller can carry out a comparison to the actual 
topology and execute the automatic commissioning. 
• IO-Controller writes the PROFINET device names in the IO-Devices: 
During startup, after the configuration is loaded, the IO-Controller then writes the defined 
device names in the IO-Devices with the help of the setpoint topology. 
• IO-Controller assigns the IP addresses to the IO-Devices: 
After the names are assigned, the assignment of the IP addresses for the individual IO-
Devices is done as a last step. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Automatic Commissioning Sequence
IO-Supervisor creates the topology in the software / the 
TIA Portal
IO-Supervisor downloads the PN-IO configuration 
including the topology to the IO-Controller
During startup, the IO-Controller writes the
PROFINET device names in the IO-Devices on the basis of 
the loaded topology
Through the name, the IO-Controller detects the 
IO-Device and, during system startup, writes the IP 
address in this IO-Device
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-5 
6.3. The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) 
 
Link Layer Discovery Protocol 
The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a manufacturer-independent Layer 2 protocol. This 
protocol is defined according to the IEEE-802.1AB standard and enables neighboring devices to 
exchange information with one another. 
In a PROFINET IO system, all devices are connected with each other via their Ethernet ports and 
through them enter into a ‘neighborhood’ relationship. That is, through these ports, each device 
cyclically sends LLDP packets with its own information to its neighbors and receives their 
information. 
Note 
The LLDP is a “one-way protocol”. The sending and the receiving of information takes place 
independent of one another. A device which sends its information to the neighboring components 
does not expect an answer or a receipt confirmation from its neighboring components. 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Topology Editor Page 5 Siemens AG © 2016
The LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol)
Link Layer Discovery Protocol:
▪ Manufacturer-independent Layer 2 protocol
▪ Enables neighboring devices to exchange information with 
one another
▪ LLDP is a “one-way protocol”! Sending and receiving 
takes place independent of one another 
Layers
Data Link
Network
Transport
Physical
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Application
Presentation
Session
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.4. Basics of LLDP 
 
Basics of the Link Layer Discovery Protocol 
LLDP packets are sent to the target address 01:80:2C:00:00:0E with the Ethernet type ID 
0x88CC. Packets which are sent to this address only reach the port of the direct neighboring 
device and are not forwarded. The information received in this way is stored by the neighboring 
component in the neighbor table (LLDP MIB (Management Information Base)). 
Each connection point in the topology is identified by an alias. The alias consists of the device 
identifier (MAC address or device name) and the port identifier (port number). Through the MAC 
address, the alias is unique in the network. In this way, the Network Management Station (e.g. 
TIA Portal) can detect the topology uniquely. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 6
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Basics of LLDP
P1 P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
TIA-Portal
I am “s7-1500”
I am “x208”
PartnerID.PortID
Port1 PartnerMAC.PartnerPort
PartnerID.PortID
Port1 PartnerMAC.PartnerPort
PartnerID.PortID
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Assigns name
Assigns name
s7-1500
Port1 PartnerMAC.PartnerPort
s7-1500
Port1 x208.P1
x208
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-7 
6.5. Topology Detection with the Help of the LLDP 
6.5.1. Structure of a PROFINET IO System 
 
Topology Detection with the Help of the LLDP 
The LLDP makes it possible for the network components to be able to fill their LLDP-MIB, that is, 
their neighbor tables with information. Through the sent LLDP telegrams, all devices connected in 
the PROFINET get the information about which device is located at which of its ports. 
Structure of a PROFINET IO System 
The devices are physically linked to one another. Since the IO-Devices do not yet have a name, 
each IO-Device sends its neighbor its own MAC address and the port number for each 
‘neighborhood’ relationship. This information is stored in the neighbor table of each IO-Device. 
Note 
The part “PartnerMAC” presented in the picture would be replaced by the actual MAC address of 
the respective partner in a real system! 
The LLDP-MIBs presented in the picture are updated in the devices approximately every 2 
minutes. For that reason, a topology error message may occur somewhat time-delayed when a 
cable is switched. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Topology Detection with the Help of the LLDP:
Structure of a PROFINET IO System
Device Name
Port PartnerMAC.PartnerPort
LLDP-MIB
Neighbor tableIO-Controller
P1 P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
---
Port1 PartnerMAC.P1
Port3 PartnerMAC.P1
Port5 PartnerMAC.P1
Port8 PartnerMAC.P1
P1
P1
P2
P1
P1
---
Port1 PartnerMAC.P3
---
Port1 PartnerMAC.P5
Port2 PartnerMAC.P1
---
Port1 PartnerMAC.P8
---
Port1 PartnerMAC.P2
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.5.2. Downloading the Configuration to the IO-Controller 
 
Downloading the Configuration into the IO-Controller 
The first step of automatic commissioning is the downloading of the configuration and thus also 
the setpoint topology into the IO-Controller. After this process is completed, the IO-Controller has 
been given a PROFINET device name. 
This name is now shared with all connected components (in the picture, only the SCALANCE 
Switch x208) by LLDP. For their part, these components enter the new information in their 
neighbor tables. 
Based on the setpoint topology, the IO-Controller can now determine with this new information 
which devices are connected to the CPU / the IO-Controller with which port. The IO-Controller 
then assigns these devices the names stored in the configuration. In the picture, the IO-Controller 
detects that the device which is connected to the CPU with its Port 1 is to be given the name 
x208 according to the setpoint topology. For that reason, this device is assigned this name by the 
IO-Controller.SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 8
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
x208
Port1 S7-1500.P1
Port3 et200sp-cpu.P1
Port5 et200sp-switch.P1
Port8 et200s.P1
Topology Detection with the Help of the LLDP:
Downloading the Configuration to the IO-Controller
IO-Controller 
is loaded
---
Port1 PartnerMAC.P1
Port3 PartnerMAC.P1
Port5 PartnerMAC.P1
Port8 PartnerMAC.P1
PROFINET IO-Controller topology information
x208
Port1 S7-1500.P1
Port3 et200sp-cpu.P1
Port5 et200sp-switch.P1
Port8 et200s.P1
et200sp-cpu
Port1 x208.P3
et200sp-switch
Port1 x208.P5
Port2 et200sp-sp.P1
et200s
Port1 x208.P8
et200sp-sp
Port1 et200sp-switch.P2
---
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Port3 PartnerMAC.P1
Port5 PartnerMAC.P1
Port8 PartnerMAC.P1
x208
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Port3 PartnerMAC.P1
Port5 PartnerMAC.P1
Port8 PartnerMAC.P1
Switch gets port 
information
IO-Controller 
assigns name
---
Port1 s7-1500.P1
x208
Port1 s7-1500.P1
P1 P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P1 P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P1 P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-9 
6.5.3. Name Information is Distributed via LLDP 
 
Name Information is Distributed via LLDP 
The SCALANCE switch has now been given new information, namely its PROFINET device 
name. The switch forwards this new information to its neighboring devices via the LLDP (in the 
picture, the et200sp-cpu, the et200sp-switch and the et200s). For their part, the neighboring 
devices then enter the new information in their neighbor tables. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Topology Editor Page 9 Siemens AG © 2016
Topology Detection with the Help of the LLDP:
Name Information is Distributed via LLDP
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P1
P1
P2
P1
---
Port1 x208.P3
---
Port1 x208.P5
Port2 PartnerMAC.P1
---
Port1 x208.P8
x208
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Port3 PartnerMAC.P1
Port5 PartnerMAC.P1
Port8 PartnerMAC.P1
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.5.4. IO-Controller assigns further Device Names 
 
IO-Controller Assigns the Remaining Device Names 
With this information and the topology information which is stored in the Controller, the Controller 
identifies the IO-Devices and assigns them their names. As soon as the Devices have been given 
a name, they share it with their partners. 
In this way, the entire PROFINET IO-System is commissioned. 
Summary 
The topology of the PROFINET IO-System is configured offline. With this setpoint topology, the 
‘neighborhood’ relationships of all PROFINET IO-Devices located in the PROFINET IO-System 
are made known to the PROFINET IO-Controller. 
From the relationships specified through the setpoint topology and the relationships detected via 
the LLDP real PROFINET-Devices, the IO-Controller can identify the IO-Devices without a name 
and assign them the configured name and the IP address. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 10
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Topology Detection with the Help of the LLDP:
IO-Controller assigns further Device Names
The procedure of exchanging LLDP information and assigning PROFINET device names is repeated 
until all devices from the setpoint topology have been given a device name!
P1 P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
IO-Controller
x208
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Port3 et200sp-cpu.P1
Port5 et200sp-switch.P1
Port8 et200s.P1
P1
P1
P2
P1
P1
et200sp-cpu
Port1 x208.P3
et200sp-switch
Port1 x208.P5
Port2 PartnerMAC.P1
et200s
Port1 x208.P8
---
Port1 et200sp-switch.P2
Et200sp-sp is then 
initialized
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-11 
6.6. Adjusting the Topology View to the Network View 
 
Adjusting the Topology View to the Network View 
The function "Apply positions from the Network view" allows you to also adopt the positions of the 
devices adjusted in the Network view in the Topology view without further effort. That is, a 
synchronization of the Topology view is made. Here, the Network view serves as a template for 
the Topology view. 
An alignment of the Network view on the basis of the Topology view is not possible! 
 
Note 
Since - on the basis of the Network view - the Topology view can only derive the configuration of 
the devices and not the wiring of the devices, only the position is adopted! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 11
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Adjusting the Topology View to the Network View
Apply positions from the 
Network view
Network view serves as 
template for 
synchronization
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.7. Creating the Setpoint Topology 
 
Creating the Setpoint Topology 
When an IO-Device is assigned to the IO-Controller in the Network view it is still not established 
how the ports are interconnected with one another. This assignment occurs in the Topology view 
or also in the Topology editor. 
An interconnection in the Network view does not generate an interconnection in the Topology 
view and vice-versa. Creating a device in one of the two views, however, also generates the 
device in the other view. 
The networking of the ports in the Topology view can either be generated graphically through 
drag & drop or through a table. For the tabular Topology overview and the tabular networking, the 
overview must be dragged into the editing window using the arrow keys or drag & drop. 
 
 
Creating a topology is not absolutely necessary! The realtime functionality of a PROFINET 
network can be used on its own. When IRT and the automatic commissioning of a PROFINET IO-
Systems is used, the creation and downloading of a setpoint (preset) topology into the IO-
Controller is, however, absolutely necessary! 
In addition to the use of IRT and the automatic commissioning, the creation of a topology also 
offers the following advantages: 
• By using an Offline/Online comparison, it is possible to carry out a setpoint-actual 
comparison for the devices which support this functionality. 
• The function “Support device replacement without exchangeable medium” is available. 
 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 12
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Creating the Setpoint Topology
Networking through
drag & drop
Topology – graphic 
presentation
Autofocus for the 
port selection
Topology – tabular 
presentation
Networking through 
tabular selection
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-13 
Note 
The interconnection of ports can also be done in the Inspector window instead of graphically or 
symbolically in the work area: 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.8. Downloading the Setpoint Topology into the IO-Controller 
 
Downloading the Setpoint Topology into the IO-Controller 
The setpoint topology created in the Topology view is downloaded into the IO-Controller together 
with the hardware configuration. After the download, the IO-Controller then compares the loaded 
setpoint topology with the real actual topology. IO-Devices without a name are now, if they fulfill 
the requirements, initialized by the IO-Controller – they are assigned the name defined in the 
setpoint topology for the Device. 
Differences between the setpoint and the actual topology are identified by the IO-Controller and 
are signaled to the user via an error evaluation. 
Note 
Differences between the setpoint topology and the actual topology are also displayed by the IO-
Controller via the diagnostic buffer. An incorrectly inserted patch cable or a wire break could also 
be identified and signaled in this way!SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 13
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Downloading the Setpoint Topology into the 
IO-Controller
PROFINET-IO topology is downloaded 
via the HW-Config
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-15 
6.9. Task Description: Creating the Setpoint Topology 
 
Task Description 
You are to configure a setpoint (preset) topology for the S7-1500 case which corresponds to the 
real topology. 
Note 
To make it easier to create the setpoint topology, you can also use the PRONETA tool. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Topology Editor Page 13 Siemens AG © 2016
Task Description:
Creating the Setpoint Topology of the 1500 Case
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.9.1. Exercise 1: Creating the Setpoint Topology of the 1500 Case 
 
Task 
In your project, you are to create a setpoint topology which corresponds to the actual topology of 
the system. Then you are to load the controller. No errors should occur for any module. If they do, 
eliminate them! 
What to Do 
1. In your project, switch to the “Topology view”. 
2. Network the individual devices with one another just as it corresponds to the real structure. 
3. Save your project. 
4. Load the controller. No errors should occur for any module. 
5. Eliminate any possible errors. 
6. Once again load and save your project. 
Note 
In the online view in the Topology editor, you can very easily control which offline wiring does not 
fit to the real wiring of the system or which has errors during running operation: 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Topology Editor Page 14 Siemens AG © 2016
Exercise 1: Creating the Setpoint Topology
Devices must be networked
according to their real connection
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-17 
6.10. Detecting the Actual Topology of a PN IO-System 
 
Detecting the Actual Topology of a PROFINET IO-System 
TIA Portal makes it possible to detect the actual topology of a PROFINET IO-System. For this, 
TIA Portal sends a topology query into the IO-System and receives in return all LLDP MIBs. 
By reading out these neighbor tables, TIA Portal can deduce the required information for building 
the interconnections between the individual devices as well as the port allocations and with that 
also the topology. 
Correlation IP Addresses and LLDP MIB 
So that the LLDP MIBs can be read out of the devices, they must have a valid IP address! 
TIA Portal can temporarily assign an IP address to devices that do not have an IP address before 
the topology is read out. This option can be found in the TIA Portal ‘Settings’ and there under the 
item: “Hardware configuration”: 
 
If this option is activated, the popup window questioning whether the TIA Portal is to assign 
temporary IP addresses to the IO-Devices appears before every Offline/Online comparison of the 
topology. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Detecting the Actual Topology of a PN IO-System
P1 P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
Topology editor
Port PartnerID.PortID
Port1 PartnerMAC.PartnerPort
Port PartnerID.PortID
Port1 PartnerMAC.PartnerPort
Port PartnerID.PortID
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Port s7-1500
Port1 PartnerMAC.PartnerPort
s7-1500
Port1 x208.P1
x208
Port1 s7-1500.P1
Topology query by the 
TIA Portal to all devices
LLDP MIBs are read-out
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.11. Offline/Online Comparison of the Topology 
 
Offline/Online Comparison of the Topology 
With the Offline/Online comparison, the configured topology is compared to the actually existing 
topology. Online detected devices are automatically assigned to the offline configured devices, as 
far as this is possible. 
An online detected device is automatically assigned to an offline existing device when the 
following properties of the two devices match: 
• PROFINET device name 
• Order number 
• Number of ports 
All devices detected online which are not automatically assigned can then also be assigned 
manually to the offline devices if they exist in the project. 
Applying the Online Topology Offline 
After the devices detected online are assigned to the offline configured devices, their port 
interconnections are compared and can then also be applied in the offline project as required. 
For this the ports, which are to be applied in the offline project, are selected and in the “Action” 
column, the selection is changed from “No action” to “Apply” for these: 
 
The loading of the online interconnection in the offline topology, for those where the selection was 
set to “Apply”, is then completed via the button “Synchronize”. 
For the standard offline/online comparison, a search method is applied which uses the DCP 
protocol. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Offline/Online Comparison of the Topology
offline networking
Synchronize
offline/online comparison online networking
Assignment to the 
Offline Device
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-19 
Advanced Offline/Online Comparison 
For the standard offline/online comparison, a search method is applied which uses the DCP 
protocol. 
For the Advanced offline/online comparison, ICMP is additionally used in order to also detect 
devices that do not support DCP. PG/PC stations, for example, belong to such devices. 
 
Note 
It can take several seconds until the Offline/Online comparison has been completely carried out 
and visualized. During this time, no operator inputs are possible. 
The progress of the Offline/Online comparison can, however, be seen in the status bar: 
 
A right-click in the Topology overview opens the selection window in which the selection “Apply 
all” can be made. All online port interconnections which can be applied are then set from “No 
action” to “Apply”. 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-20 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.12. Device Replacement without Exchangeable Medium 
 
Device Replacement without Exchangeable Medium 
IO-Devices, which do not have a slot for a removable media (e.g. ET 200SP, ET 200MP) or which 
support the PROFINET functionality ‘device exchange without exchangeable medium/PG’, can be 
replaced without a removable media - containing a stored device name - having to be inserted or 
without the device name having to be assigned with the PG. The replacement IO-Device no 
longer receives the device name from the removable media or from the PG but from the IO-
Controller. 
To assign the device name, the IO-Controller uses the configured topology and the 
‘neighborhood’ relationships detected from the IO-Devices. 
In the Online Support pages, under the Entry ID: 36752540, you will find a listing of all IO-
Controllers and all IO-Devices which support the automatic commissioning without topology, that 
is, the ‘device exchange without exchangeable medium’. 
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/36752540 
So that the name assignment by the IO-Controller can function smoothly, however, the IO-Device 
must first be brought back to its delivered condition, that is, its factory settings since the IO-
Controller can normally not overwrite the PROFINET device name of the IO-Device. 
Note 
So that the device replacement without exchangeable medium is carried out without a problem, 
the connection of the new IO-Device must take place exactly the same as for the replaced IO-
Device. That is, the port interconnection must match since the setpoint topology otherwiseno 
longer matches the actual topology and the IO-Controller cannot assign a name to the IO-Device. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 18
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Device Replacement without Exchangeable Medium
Device does not support a 
removable media
Requirement: 
delivered condition
Must be activated in the 
IO-Controller
IO-Device must support 
the function
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/de/de/view/36752540
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-21 
6.13. Overwriting the PROFINET Device Name 
 
Permitting Overwriting of the PROFINET Device Name 
The function: “Permit overwriting of device names of all assigned IO-Devices” makes it possible 
to exchange PROFINET IO-Devices without first resetting them to their delivered condition / their 
factory settings. Before the IO-Controller overwrites the PROFINET device name, a check is 
made as to whether the type of the new IO-Device matches the type of the configured IO-Device. 
If this is the case, the configured name is then written in the IO-Device. 
This functionality is possible with an S7-1500 CPU as of Firmware Version V1.5 and with an 
ET200SP CPU as of Firmware Version V1.6. The effort in replacing an IO-Device is reduced with 
this function. 
Note 
If the option "Permit overwriting of device names of all assigned IO-Devices" is activated, 
incorrectly connected devices can be given an incorrect PROFINET device name from the 
configuration. 
Depending on the connected peripherals, malfunctions can cause danger to life, serious risk of 
injury or material damage! 
In every case of a device exchange, check whether the correct replacement device is connected 
and that the port interconnection meets the configured setpoint topology in order to avoid any 
possibility of risk! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 19
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Overwriting the PROFINET Device Name
IO-Device exchange
Delivered condition 
not required
IO-Controller overwrites 
the name
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-22 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.14. Task Description: Detecting the Remaining Topology of the 
System and Testing the Automatic Commissioning 
 
Task Description 
The topological networking of the remaining system components is not to be entered manually 
but is to be detected using TIA Portal. First the missing Devices must naturally be generated, 
configured, parameterized as well as networked in the project! 
Then, the PROFINET functions for automatic commissioning of a system, such as, the 
functionalities “…device replacement without exchangeable medium” or also “…overwriting of 
(PROFINET) device names…” are to be activated and tested in the controller. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 20
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Aufgabenstellung: Restliche Topologie der Anlage 
ermitteln und die automatische IBN testen
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-23 
6.14.1. Exercise 2: Configuration 
& Parameterization of the Missing Devices (Scalance + ET 200SP PLC) 
 
Task 
You are to complete your project by inserting the missing devices in TIA Portal which are already 
physically networked (CPU 1510SP-1PN + SCALANCE XC208). 
The digital inputs and outputs of the 1510SP-1PN controller get the address 0. The controller is 
assigned the IP address 192.168.222.10 with the subnet mask 255.255.255.0. The PROFINET 
device name is “1510-io-controller”. 
For the SCALANCE XC208, the PROFINET device name “scalancexc208” is set in the hardware 
configuration offline. It is assigned the IP address 192.168.222.208 with the subnet mask 
255.255.255.0. The S7-1513 takes on the role of its IO-Controller. 
Subsequently, you are to integrate the two new Devices into the existing PROFINET IO-System. 
What to Do 
1. As a new device, add a SIMATIC ET200CPU. Pay attention to the correct MLFB Number and 
the correct Firmware Version. You can also use the functionality “Detect the configuration of 
the connected device” by using an unspecified CPU: 
 
 
2. Configure and parameterize the PLC according to the task. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 21
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Exercise 2: Configuration & Parameterization of the 
Missing Devices (Scalance + ET 200SP PLC)
Add (detect) 
ET 200SP CPU
Add Scalance XC208
192.168.222.10
255.255.255.0
1510-io-controller
192.168.222.208
255.255.255.0
scalancexc208
1513 is IO-Controller for 
the Switch
I/O addresses: 0/0
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-24 Training Document, V15.01.00 
3. Insert a new device of the type SCALANCE XC-200 managed. Here as well, pay attention to 
the correct MLFB Number and the correct Firmware Version. 
4. Parameterize the SCALANCE XC208 according to the task. 
5. Network the devices in the Network view in TIA PORTAL. 
6. Set up the PROFINET IO-System in such a way that the S7-1513 functions as the IO-
Controller for the Switch and not the S7-1510SP. 
7. Create a new group with the name "1510Case" and assign the S7-1510SP as well as the 
SCALANCE XC208 to it. 
8. Save your project. 
9. Download both controllers. 
10. The error LED of the S7-1513 should begin to flash. This state is normal and will be fixed in 
 the following exercises! 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-25 
6.14.2. Exercise 3: Detecting the Actual Topology 
 
Task 
You are to detect the actual topology of your components. For this, use the integrated 
Offline/Online comparison of the Topology editor in TIA Portal. 
What to Do 
1. Open the Topology view in your project. 
2. Show (Expand) the Topology overview. 
3. Start an Offline/Online comparison. It can take a few seconds until it shows the desired data. 
The current progress is presented in the lower right corner in TIA Portal. 
4. Apply the actual topology in your project and then synchronize the setpoint and the actual 
topology. Pay attention to the note! 
5. Save your project. 
6. Download the S7-1513. The error LED continues to flash. This is a desired state! 
7. Download the S7-1510SP. If the error LED also flashes for this one, it is also OK! 
Note 
It may be that you have to assign the correct Offline-Devices to the Online-Devices before 
applying the actual topology in your project. If necessary, do this using this drop-down window: 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 22
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Exercise 3: Detecting the Actual Topology
Carry out Offline/Online 
comparison
Apply all and Synchronize
Show / hide 
Topology overview
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-26 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.14.3. Exercise 4: Activating a Device Replacement without Exchangeable 
Medium 
 
Task 
You are to check whether the functionality “Support device replacement without exchangeable 
medium” is activated in the S7-1513 as well as in the S7-1510SP. If this is not the case, activate 
them. Then you are to test this functionality by resetting the ET 200SP to its factory settings. It 
should now automatically be re-initialized by the S7-1513 without you having to do anything! If the 
functionality is deactivated, this should not be the case! Test both cases! 
What to Do 
1. Check whether the functionality is activated in both controllers. If this is not the case, activate 
this option and download both controllers! 
2. With the help of the Online access, reset the ET 200SP to its factory settings. 
3. The ET200SP and all its modules should now flash green. 
4. After a short time, the IO-Controller will automatically initialize the IO-Device,the ET 200SP, 
and also assign it the IP address. The ET 200SP and its modules should now once again light 
up green. 
5. Deactivate the functionality in the S7-1513 and download the controller. 
6. Once again, reset the ET 200SP to its factory settings. 
7. The ET 200SP and its modules should now once again flash green. The flashing will not, 
however, stop since the IO-Controller cannot automatically initialize the ET 200SP. 
8. Ping the IP address of the ET 200SP. This should not be accessible. 
9. Activate the functionality in the S7-1513 and download it. 
10. The ET 200SP should now once again light up green. 
11. Ping the ET 200SP. It should once again be accessible. 
12. Save your project. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 23
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Exercise 4: 
Device Replacement without Exchangeable Medium
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-27 
Note 
The flashing of the S7-1513 error LED is still a normal state! 
The functionality “Support device replacement without exchangeable medium” is activated on the 
S7-1500 by default! 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-28 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.14.4. Exercise 5: Permit Overwriting the Device Names 
 
Task 
Finally, you are to activate the functionality “Permit overwriting of device names of all assigned IO 
devices” on the S7-1513. With this function, the controller can overwrite the SCALANCE XC208 
which has an incorrect PROFINET device name and so causes the error on the S7-1513. Then, 
you are to change the device names of the IO-Devices for further tests. You are to do this using 
the function “Assign name” in the ‘Online access’. When the functionality is activated, the 
controller should simply overwrite the names once again. 
What to Do 
1. Activate the functionality on the S7-1513 and download it. 
2. All modules should now light up green and the S7-1513 error LED should no longer flash. 
3. As a test, overwrite the names of the ET200SP and the SCALANCE XC208. After a few 
cycles, the controller should overwrite them with the names specified in the hardware 
configuration. 
4. Save your project! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 24
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Exercise 5: Permit Overwriting the Device Names
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
Training Document, V15.01.00 6-29 
6.15. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to complete a topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Topologie-Editor Seite 24 Siemens AG © 2016
Wenn Sie noch mehr wissen wollen
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Topology Editor 
6-30 Training Document, V15.01.00 
6.15.1. Device Replacement without Topological Configuration 
 
Device Replacement without Topological Configuration 
The functionality: “Device replacement without topological configuration” permits a device 
exchange without a removable media and without configured setpoint topology in the IO-
Controller. 
This function is supported by the following IO-Devices: 
• ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN HF with the article number 6ES7155-6AU00-0CN0 as of 
Firmware V2.0 
• ET 200SP IM 155-6 PN ST with the article number 6ES7155-6AA00-0BN0 and 6ES7155-
6AU00-0BN0 as of Firmware V3.1 
For these IO-Devices, the device name is also additionally stored on the bus adapter, if it is of the 
type BA 2xRJ45 or 2xFC. Due to the fact that the name can be stored both on the interface 
module and on the bus adapter, the following scenarios can result when the interface module is 
replaced: 
 
 Interface module empty Interface module with device 
name 
Bus adapter 
empty 
No device name exists. Device name from interface 
module is used and copied onto 
the bus adapter 
Bus adapter 
with device 
name 
Device name from bus adapter is used 
and copied onto the interface module. 
Device name from bus adapter is 
used and copied onto the 
interface module, if the module 
contains another device name. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 26
IK-TIAPN
Topology Editor
Device Replacement without Topological 
Configuration
ET 200SP supports device 
replacement without 
topological configuration
PROFINET-Gerätenamen 
wird auf dem Bus Adapter 
abgelegt
PROFINET device name is 
stored on the bus adapter
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-1 
 
Contents 7 
 
 
 
 
 
7. Diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 7-2 
7.1. Diagnostic Possibilities ......................................................................................................... 7-3 
7.2. Diagnostics via LEDs ............................................................................................................ 7-4 
7.2.1. LEDs of the PLC S7-1513 – 1PN.......................................................................................... 7-4 
7.2.2. LEDs of the SCALANCE XC208 ........................................................................................... 7-5 
7.2.3. LEDs of the ET 200SP .......................................................................................................... 7-6 
7.2.4. LEDs of the PLC S7-1510SP – 1PN ..................................................................................... 7-7 
7.3. System Diagnostics .............................................................................................................. 7-8 
7.4. Diagnostics with the Help of Display Units ........................................................................... 7-9 
7.5. Task Description: Commissioning and Diagnosis of the TP700 ......................................... 7-10 
7.5.1. Exercise 1: Inserting the TP700 from the Library & Connecting it with the S7-1513 ......... 7-11 
7.5.2. Exercise 2: Creating the Diagnostics View on the TP700 Comfort .................................... 7-12 
7.6. Detecting the Hardware Identifier of an I/O Module............................................................ 7-13 
7.7. Detecting the Hardware Identifier of an IO-Device ............................................................. 7-14 
7.7.1. Data Type GEOADDR ........................................................................................................ 7-15 
7.8. Activating / Deactivating an IO-Device ............................................................................... 7-16 
7.9. Reading-out the Device Name of the IO-Device ................................................................. 7-18 
7.10. Task Description: Reading-out the ET 200SP Device Name and Activating / Deactivating the 
IO-Device ............................................................................................................................ 7-19 
7.10.1. Exercise 3: Reading-out the ET 200SP Hardware Identifier and Outputting it on the HMI 7-20 
7.10.2. Exercise 4: Activating / Deactivating the ET 200SP ........................................................... 7-22 
7.10.3. Exercise 5: Reading-out the ET 200SP Device Name and Outputting it on the HMI ......... 7-23 
7.11. Reading-out the Module LED Status .................................................................................. 7-24 
7.12. Reading-out the Device and Module States ....................................................................... 7-25 
7.13. Task Description: Reading-out the Module State of the ET 200SP ................................... 7-27 
7.13.1. Exercise 6: Reading-out the Module State of the ET 200SP .............................................. 7-28 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with IndustrialEthernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7. Diagnostics 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Diagnostics Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... have a basic overview of the various diagnostic possibilities in the 
TIA Portal
... be familiar with the meaning of the LEDs of the different 
components
... be familiar with the system diagnostics
... be able to operate the diagnostics with the help of display units
... be able to program different instructions for diagnostics
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-3 
7.1. Diagnostic Possibilities 
 
Diagnostic Possibilities 
The automation world of SIMATIC offers you a wide range of diagnostic possibilities. For the 
simplest diagnostic possibility – the visual inspection of LEDs on the SIMATIC devices, for 
example – you do not have to carry out any other activities or programming. For a system 
diagnostics or the visualization of the diagnostics on the display devices, you hardly have to do 
anything either. 
Further and more in-depth diagnostic possibilities are usually defined in the user program and, for 
their part, then require advanced programming knowledge. 
On the Service & Support pages, you will find an article on diagnostics with an S7-1500 under the 
Entry ID number: 98210758. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Diagnostic Possibilities
Possibilities Use Conditions
LEDs Directly visible diagnostics On-site on the hardware possible
PG / TIA Portal
More detailed diagnostic 
information
Engineering software necessary
System diagnostics
Predefined diagnostic 
information
Is set in the hardware configuration 
Display devices 
(CPU-Display / Web 
server / HMI)
Same presentation of the 
diagnostic information
Connection to the CPU is required
User program
Reaction to events directly 
possible in the program
Additional programming effort
ID: 98210758
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.2. Diagnostics via LEDs 
7.2.1. LEDs of the PLC S7-1513 – 1PN 
 
LINK-LEDs of the PLC (X1P1, X1P2) 
In order to determine why communication between two partners in the network does not work, 
you should first of all always rule out a physical problem! That is, you must check whether a 
physical connection, normally via an Ethernet cable, even exists between the devices. 
In this case, the LINK-LEDs of the controller lend themselves for this. These signal whether a 
LINK, that is a physical connection, is established between the port assigned to the LED and the 
communications partner or not. If this LED if off, no LINK connection exists at the moment. This 
can be caused either through a wire break in the cable, a general cable break or simply a plug 
that is not wired 100 percent. 
Communication between Devices 
When the devices connected to the PROFINET or Ethernet interface exchange data amongst 
themselves, the associated LINK-LED begins to flicker yellow. The faster the flickering, the faster 
the transmission frequency is between the partners. 
Note 
If the LINK-LED appears to take on a continuous light, the transmission frequency is so high (fast) 
that the LED only displays a yellow color. 
This behavior can frequently be observed with a coupling between a PROFINET IO-Controller 
and a PROFINET IO-Device. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Diagnostics via LEDs
LEDs of the PLC 1513 – 1PN 
Run/Error/Maint-LEDs
LINK RX/TX-LEDs
Options LINK-LED Meaning
LED off A LINK connection does not exist.
LED lights up green
There is an Ethernet connection to a 
communications partner.
LED flashes green The "LED flash test" is being performed.
LED flickers yellow
Data is being exchanged with a communications 
partner via the PROFINET interface.
LED lights up yellow
Transmission frequency in the PROFINET is so fast 
that the flickering appears as a continuous light. 
ID: 59186494
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-5 
7.2.2. LEDs of the SCALANCE XC208 
 
Display Mode LEDs of the SCALANCE XC208 (DM1, DM2) 
The LEDs (DM1, DM2) indicate which display mode is set. There are 4 display modes (A, B, C 
and D). Display mode A is the standard mode. Depending on display mode set, the Power LEDs 
(L1, L2) and the Port LEDs show different information. 
Power LEDs of the SCALANCE XC208 (L1, L2) 
The Power LEDs (L1, L2) of the SCALANCE XC208 indicate in which voltage range the power 
supply at the L1 as well as at the L2 connections finds itself or whether the power supply is 
generally monitored. 
Port LEDs of the SCALANCE XC208 (P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, P8) 
The Port LEDs of the SCALANCE XC208 show the same behavior as the LINK LEDs of the S7-
1513-1PN. 
Fault LED of the SCALANCE XC208 (F) 
The Fault LED of the SCALANCE XC208 indicates whether the SCALANCE XC208 is currently in 
an error-free operation (LED is not lit up) or whether an error detected by the device is currently 
pending (LED is lit up or flashes red). 
The possible errors detected by the SCALANCE XC208 are listed in the picture. Depending on 
the model of the SCALANCE family, different errors and also various numbers of errors are 
detected by the respective device. 
Redundancy Manager LED of the SCALANCE XC208 (RM) 
The RM LED of the SCALANCE XC208 indicates whether the SCALANCE XC208 is 
parameterized as a redundancy manager or not. Furthermore, with an active redundancy 
manager role, it signals whether the ring is interrupted or not. 
Standby LED of the SCALANCE XC208 (SB) 
The Standby LEDs (SB) of the SCALANCE XC208 is used to display the standby function of the 
SCALANCE XC208. Furthermore, it indicates the status (active/passive). 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 5
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Diagnostics via LEDs
LEDs of the SCALANCE XC208
Fault/RM/Standby/Anzeige-
modus/Power-LEDs
Port-LEDs
Options Fault-LED Meaning
LED flashes red An internal error was detected. 
LED lights up red
-Link Down event at one of the monitored 
ports
-Loss of one of the two redundant power 
supplies
-C-Plug error
-Switch startup (20 seconds)
-Device is in PROFINET operation:
→no connection to the controller
→diagnostic interrupt pending
-Redundancy manager connected through
-Loop Detection
ID: 109476763
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.2.3. LEDs of the ET 200SP 
 
LINK LEDs of the Bus Adapter (LK1, LK2) 
The various light patterns of the LINK LEDs of the bus adapter are shown in the picture. Unlike 
the LINK LEDs of the PLC S7-1513 - 1PN and the SCALANCE XC208, these do not flash yellow 
when data is exchanged between the connected devices.They only indicate, through a green 
continuous light, that a communication between the connection partners exists. 
Power LED of the ET 200SP (PWR) 
The Power LED of the Interface Module IM155-6PN ST of the ET200 SP indicates, through a 
green continuous light, that there is sufficient supply voltage. If the Power LED does not light up, 
there is no or too little voltage connected to the ET200 SP. 
Run, Error, Maint LEDs of the ET 200SP (RN, ER, MT) 
A listing of the various light and flashing patterns of the Run, Error and Maint LEDs can be found 
in the manual of the SIMATIC ET200 SP Interface Module IM 155-6 PN ST. This can be found on 
the Service and Support page under the Entry-ID: 59768173. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 6
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Diagnostics via LEDs
LEDs of the ET 200SP
Power LED
LINK LX-LEDs
Options LINK-LED Meaning
LED off A LINK connection does not exist.
LED lights up green
There is an Ethernet connection to acommunications partner.
LED flashes green The "LED flash test" is being performed.
Run/Error/Maint-LEDs
ID: 59768173 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-7 
7.2.4. LEDs of the PLC S7-1510SP – 1PN 
 
LINK LED of the PLC 1510SP – 1PN (LK3) 
The various light patterns of the LINK LEDs of the PLC S7-1510SP – 1PN are shown in the 
picture. Unlike the LINK LEDs of the PLC S7-1513 - 1PN and the SCALANCE XC208, these do 
not flash yellow when data is exchanged between the connected devices. It only indicates, 
through a green continuous light, that a communication between the connection partners exists. 
The PLC S7-1510SP - 1PN has an integrated PROFINET interface with one port. Additional ports 
can, however, be added via an optional bus adapter (BA) (similar to an ET 200SP). 
Power, Run, Error, Maint LEDs of the ET 200SP (PWR, R/S, ER, MT) 
A listing of the various light and flashing patterns of the Power, Run, Error and Maint LEDs can be 
found in the manual of the SIMATIC ET 200SP CPU S7-1510SP - 1PN. This can be found on the 
Service and Support page under the Entry -ID: 90157130. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Diagnostics via LEDs
LEDs of the PLC 1510SP – 1PN
Run/Error/Maint-LEDs
LINK LK-LED CPU
Optional BA module
Power LED
LINK LX-LEDs BA
ID: 90157130
Options LINK-LED Meaning
LED off
A LINK connection does not 
exist.
LED lights up green
There is an Ethernet 
connection to a 
communications partner.
LED flashes green
The "LED flash test" is being 
performed.
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.3. System Diagnostics 
 
System Diagnostics 
The system diagnostics of an S7-1500 is always activated by default and cannot be deactivated 
by you. No further handling is necessary in order to use these diagnostic possibilities. 
What you can set is whether the different Alarm Categories generate alarms and whether these 
are to require an acknowledgement or not. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 8
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
System Diagnostics
Always active
Possible settings
RSE no longer necessary
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-9 
7.4. Diagnostics with the Help of Display Units 
 
Diagnostics with the Help of Display Units 
Since a programming device is not always available in a plant in order to look at the diagnostic 
buffer of the PLC to see what kind of error is currently pending and since the controller has 
normally ‘disappeared’ inside the control cabinet so that the display of the S7-1500 is not 
accessible without a problem, the possibility of diagnostics on display units lends itself for this. 
For system diagnostics on Siemens HMI devices, there is a prefabricated Control which is simply 
dragged into the HMI screen using drag & drop and which then provides the user with the 
relevant diagnostic information there. 
System Diagnostics View Control 
The system diagnostics view makes it possible to present the diagnostic buffer of the connected 
CPU on the HMI device. 
A further function is the overview of the PROFINET IO-System and the graphic presentation of 
failed devices. This diagnosis is even available module-by-module! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 9
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Diagnostics with the Help of Display Units
Exchange 
diagnostic data
Sends diagnostic 
data
HW diagnostics on 
the HMI
Diagnostic buffer 
PLC on HMI
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.5. Task Description: Commissioning and Diagnosis of the TP700 
 
Task Description 
You are to commission the TP700 Comfort which is located in your S7-1500 case. For this, you 
are to use the template which is located in the “IK-TIAPN” library. Then, you are to establish an 
HMI connection between the TP700 Comfort and the CPU S7-1513 - 1PN and create the system 
diagnostics view on the Panel. Finally, you are to test whether the diagnostics view also supplies 
the desired data. 
Your old TP700 Comfort must be deleted from the library before you commission the Panel! 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Diagnostics Page 10 Siemens AG © 2016
Task Description:
Commissioning and Diagnosis of the TP700
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-11 
7.5.1. Exercise 1: 
Inserting the TP700 from the Library & Connecting it with the S7-1513 
 
Task 
You are to open the “IK-TIAPN” library and then insert the prefabricated touchpanel TP700 
Comfort located in the folder “Chapter7” from the library into your project. Then, you are to 
establish an HMI connection between the touchpanel and the CPU 1513 - 1PN. 
The library is located on your computer in the following path: 
C:\Archives\TIA_Portal\IK-TIAPN 
What to Do 
1. Delete the TP700 Comfort from your project. 
2. Open the “IK-TIAPN” library. 
3. Using drag & drop, drag the TP700 Comfort “touch-me” from the folder “Chapter7” and the 
subfolder “HMI” into your project. 
4. Establish an HMI connection between the TP700 Comfort and the CPU S7-1513 - 1PN. 
5. Rewire (re-network) the lost topology between the S7-1513 and the Panel as well as between 
the Panel and the SCALANCE XC208. 
6. Also drag the new TP700 Comfort back into the folder "1513Case". 
7. Save your project. 
8. Download the S7-1513. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 11
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Exercise 1: Inserting the TP700 
from the Library & Connecting it with the S7-1513
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.5.2. Exercise 2: Creating the Diagnostics View on the TP700 Comfort 
 
Task 
You are to create the diagnostics view on the TP700 Comfort and test it. 
What to Do 
1. Open the already existing “Diagnosis” screen in the touchpanel. 
2. Using drag & drop, drag the Control “System diagnostics view” into the screen. 
3. Adjust the size and the properties of the Control as required. 
4. Compile the touchpanel. 
5. Download your configuration into the touchpanel. 
6. Test your diagnostics view. 
7. Correct, if necessary, your project. 
8. Save your changes. 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 12
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Exercise 2: Creating the Diagnostics View on the 
TP700 Comfort
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-13 
7.6. Detecting the Hardware Identifier of an I/O Module 
 
IO2MOD 
The instruction “IO2MOD” allows you to read out the hardware identifier of a module from an I/O 
address of the module. The instruction is located in the Extended Instructions and there in the 
folder “Addressing”. 
At the input “ADDR”, variables of the type I, Q, PI or PQ can be specified. If the programming 
language SCL is used, the type PQ is not permitted. The hardware identifier is returned through 
the data type “HW_IO” or “HW_ANY”. 
The function “IO2MOD” has an internal error evaluation using the output “RET_VAL”. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 13
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Detecting the Hardware Identifier of an I/O Module
Address of module
Hardware identifier
Data type: HW_ANY
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.7. Detecting the Hardware Identifier of an IO-Device 
 
GEO2LOG 
In the Extended Instructions in the folder “Addressing”, you will find the instruction “GEO2LOG”. 
This instruction allows you to detect the hardware identifier of an IO-Device during runtime of the 
controller.The hardware identifier is detected through the slot information of the IO-Device. This 
information is passed to the instruction via the data type “GEOADDR”. 
The hardware identifier is returned with the help of the data type “HW_ANY”. 
Note 
The instruction “GEO2LOG” also has a system-internal error evaluation which is evaluated via the 
parameter “RET_VAL”. The meaning of the error code which is output can be found in the block 
help in TIA Portal. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 14
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Detecting the Hardware Identifier of an IO-Device
Data type: GEOADDR
Hardware identifier
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-15 
7.7.1. Data Type GEOADDR 
 
GEOADDR 
The data type “GEOADDR” is a structure which consists of the following components: 
• HWTYPE: 
The component “HWTYPE” determines which further components of the structure 
“GEOADDR” are evaluated. 
• AREA: 
Specification of the bus system to be evaluated. 
• IOSYSTEM: 
Identifier for the IO-System. The identifier for PROFINET is always 100! 
• STATION: 
Specification of the station number, if “AREA” > 0. If “AREA” = 0 then the rack is specified 
here. 
• SLOT: 
Slot number 
• SUBSLOT: 
Number of the submodule 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 15
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Data Type GEOADDR
0:Central module 1: PROFINET IO 
2: PROFIBUS DP 3: AS-I
1: IO-System 2: IO-Device/DP-Slave 
3: Rack 4: Module 5: Submodule
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.8. Activating / Deactivating an IO-Device 
 
D_ACT_DP 
The function “D_ACT_DP” can be used to specifically activate or deactivate DP-Slaves as well as 
PROFINET IO-Devices. As a further functionality, the instruction also offers the possibility of 
reading out the current status of the DP-Slave / PROFINET IO-Device, that is, whether the device 
is currently activated or deactivated. 
Especially for maintenance work or similar work on distributed I/Os, it makes sense to deactivate 
the device before beginning the job so that no unnecessary error messages or error reactions can 
occur on the CPU and be executed. 
The function “D_ACT_DP” can be found in the Extended Instructions in the folder “Distributed 
I/O”. 
The instruction “D_ACT_DP” is an asynchronous working instruction, that is, the execution can 
extend over several CPU cycles / calls. An internal error evaluation and the status display on the 
current task can be taken from the parameters “RET_VAL” and “BUSY”. 
Note 
If you take the hardware identifiers from the previous pages as an example, the block can only 
deactivate and activate the IO-Device ET 200SP with the hardware identifier 264. 
 
If the hardware identifier 266 is used, the function “D_ACT_DP” outputs the following error: 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Activating / Deactivating an IO-Device
activate/deactiviate
+ status IO-Device
not edge-triggered
Activation Deactivation
Hardware 
identifier
Read-out status
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-17 
 
 
 
The plain text for the error number: 8093 can then be taken from the Help: 
8093: 
For the address specified in LADDR, there is no DP-Slave/PROFINET IO-Device which can be 
activated or deactivated. 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.9. Reading-out the Device Name of the IO-Device 
 
Get_Name 
If the hardware identifier of the PROFINET IO-System and the device number of the PROFINET 
IO-Device is known, the PROFINET device name of the IO-Device can be read-out at runtime 
with the help of the instruction “Get_Name”. 
The device name which is output corresponds to the name of the header module. 
The “Get_Name” instruction is an acyclic instruction. It can take longer than one CPU cycle for 
the function to read out the name of the PROFINET device. Through the parameters “DONE” and 
“BUSY”, you can see the current status of the reading-out of the name. The parameter “ERROR” 
is used by the instruction as an error output. 
Note 
If the PROFINET device name is longer than the area specified at the parameter “DATA”, the 
parameter is filled with the maximum possible number of characters and the remaining are 
discarded. 
The length of the PROFINET device name can also be taken from the output parameter “LEN” of 
the instruction “Get_Name”. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Reading-out the Device Name of the IO-Device
Hardware-Kennung
PROFINET IO System
Device number
Hardware identifier 
PROFINET IO System
PROFINET 
device name
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-19 
7.10. Task Description: Reading-out the ET 200SP Device Name 
and Activating / Deactivating the IO-Device 
 
Task Description 
Having integrated the HMI device for diagnosis in your project in the previous exercise, this is 
now to be used to read out the device name of the ET 200SP at runtime and to be able to 
activate as well as deactivate the IO-Device at any time. The programming of this new 
functionality takes place in the “FB_Diagnosis” function block which is to be created. This function 
block is called in OB1 with the instance data block “iDB_FB_Diagnosis”. 
The HMI screen for communication with the controller already exists in the library. The screen 
elements are linked with the tags/variables of the data block “PROFINET_Diagnosis”. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 18
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Task Description: Reading-out the ET200SP Device 
Name and Activating / Deactivating the IO-Device
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-20 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.10.1. Exercise 3: 
Reading-out the ET 200SP Hardware Identifier and Outputting it on the HMI 
 
Task 
You are to integrate the data block “PROFINET_Diagnosis” into your project and use the 
variables contained in this block for parameterizing the PLC instructions. 
You are to read out the hardware identifier of the ET 200SP and this is subsequently to be output 
on the HMI screen “PROFINET-IO”. The reading-out of the hardware identifier is to take place in 
the function block “FB_Diagnosis”. This function block is called in the organization block “Main” 
and must be created by you. 
What to Do 
1. Using drag & drop, drag the data block called “PROFINET_Diagnosis” from the IK-TIAPN 
library in the folder Chapter7 in the subfolder “SPS” into your project. 
2. Create a new function block called “FB_Diagnosis” and call it in your OB1. Name the instance 
data block “iDB_FB_Diagnosis”. 
3. In your FB, create the instructions necessary for reading out and outputting the hardware 
identifier. 
4. Download the changes into the controller. 
5. Drag the HMI screen “PROFINET-IO” into the folder “Screens” and the tag table 
“PROFINET_Diagnosis” into the folder “HMI tags” which are located in the Device “touch-me”. 
6. Link the "PROFINET-IO" screen with the "Start" screen just as it is in the "Diagnosis" screen. 
7. Load the changes onto your HMI device and test your program. 
8. If necessary, make changes so that your program matches the task. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 19
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Exercise 3: Reading-out the ET200SP Hardware 
Identifier and Outputting it on the HMI
Drag & Drop
Read out the 
HW identifier
Output HW 
identifier
HMI screen for 
output
Input 
GEOADDR
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-21 
Note 
Please note that thedata types “HW_ANY” and “HW_IO” cannot be used on the TP700 Comfort! 
If necessary, take another look at the structure of the data type “GEOADDR” in the Online Help of 
TIA Portal. 
As required, use temporary as well as static variables in the function block! 
It may be that the connection between the touchpanel and the controller does not correspond to 
the configured connection in the tag table “PROFINET_Diagnosis”. In this case, adjust the 
connection and re-synchronize the HMI tags! 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-22 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.10.2. Exercise 4: Activating / Deactivating the ET 200SP 
 
Task 
After the hardware identifier is read-out, it is now to be used to activate and deactivate your IO-
Device during runtime. Furthermore, the status of the IO-Device can then also be read out. 
This functionality, as well, is output on the TP700 Comfort and controlled by it. 
What to Do 
1. Program the functionality called for in the task in your FB “FB_Diagnosis”. 
2. Download and test your programming. 
3. If necessary, make changes so that your program matches the task. 
Note 
The “REQ” parameter of the function “D_ACT_DP” is not edge-controlled. 
As required, use temporary as well as static variables in the function block! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 20
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Exercise 4: Activating / Deactivating the ET200SP
Switch on/off 
IO-Device
Control 
D_ACT_DP
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-23 
7.10.3. Exercise 5: Reading-out the ET 200SP Device Name and Outputting it on 
the HMI 
 
Task 
Finally, the PROFINET device name of the ET 200SP is to be read out and presented on the HMI 
device. 
This functionality is also to be implemented in the FB “FB_Diagnosis”. 
What to Do 
1. Open the function block “FB_Diagnosis” and program the functionality. 
2. Download and test your programming. 
3. If necessary, make changes so that your program matches the task. 
4. Save your project. 
Note 
The call of the instruction “Get_Name” is to be made using a multiple instance. 
As required, use temporary as well as static variables in the function block! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 21
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Exercise 5: Reading-out the ET200SP 
Device Name and Outputting it on the HMI
Read out the IO-
Device name
Control 
Get_Name
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-24 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.11. Reading-out the Module LED Status 
 
LED 
In a plant, most controllers are installed in the control cabinet. This means that the simplest way 
of quickly doing a system diagnostics, namely looking at the LEDs on the controller or the 
component, is not possible. 
The instruction “LED”, however, makes it possible to read out the LEDs of a module and so 
visualize the LED Status on a display unit or similar. This way, the LED Status of the module can 
be analyzed and evaluated through the program. 
The instruction “LED” requires the hardware identifier of the module for this and the specific 
identification number of the LED on the module. If this does not exist, it is displayed through the 
output parameter “RET_VAL”. Through this parameter, the status of the LED, such as, flashing 
with 1 Hz or flashing with 2Hz, can also be displayed. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 22
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Reading-out the Module LED Status
Hardware identifier
LED-Nummer
1 STOP/RUN
2 ERROR
3 MAINT (Maintenance)
4 Redundant
5Link (green)
6 RX/TX (yellow)
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-25 
7.12. Reading-out the Device and Module States 
 
DeviceStates 
If the state or the status information of all modules within a PROFINET IO-System or within a DP-
Master system has to be queried, the instruction “DeviceStates” can be used. This allows you to 
read out different statuses of the connected Devices through the parameter “Mode”. These 
statuses are stored in the InOut parameter “STATE”. If the status information of a PROFINET IO-
System is to be read-out, an Array of 1024 bits is used at the parameter “STATE”; for a DP-
Master system, an Array of 128 bits is used. For this Array, the Bit 0, that is, the first bit, always 
serves as the group display for both systems. If for at least one Device the bit of the status 
display is set to 1, the group display bit also has the Status 1. 
For a PROFINET IO-System, the individual bits of the Array correspond to the device numbers of 
the individual IO-Devices. For a DP-Master system, the bits then correspond to the PROFIBUS 
addresses of the individual DP-Slaves. 
ModuleStates 
If, instead of the state of a PROFINET IO-System or a DP-Master system, the state of the 
individual modules of an IO-Device or a DP-Slave has to be read-out, the function “ModuleStates” 
can then be used. With the help of this instruction, different status information of the individual 
modules can be queried through the input parameter “MODE”. Just as for the instruction 
“DeviceStates”, the statuses of the individual modules are then stored in the InOut parameter 
“STATE”. The parameter “STATE” is an Array with 128 bits. Here as well, the first bit serves as 
the group display. If a bit in the Array is set to 1 through the instruction “ModuleStates”, the group 
display is also automatically set to 1. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 23
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Reading-out the Device and Module States
Array [0..1023] of BOOL
Array [0..127] of BOOL
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-26 Training Document, V15.01.00 
MODE 
The value passed via the parameter “MODE” to the instructions “DeviceStates” and 
“ModuleStates” causes the same configuration for both instructions. The only difference is that 
the setting for the instruction “DeviceStates” refers to the individual Devices/Slaves and for the 
instruction “ModuleStates” it refers to the individual modules. The following status information can 
be queried via the configuration of the parameter “MODE”: 
1. IO-Devices/DP-Slaves – Modules are configured 
2. IO-Devices/DP-Slaves – Modules have failed 
3. IO-Devices/DP-Slaves – Modules deactivated 
4. IO-Devices/DP-Slaves – Modules present 
5. IO-Devices/DP-Slaves – Modules for which a problem has occurred: 
• Maintenance necessary or recommended 
• Not accessible 
• Not available 
• Error has occurred 
• … 
 
 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
Training Document, V15.01.00 7-27 
7.13. Task Description: Reading-out the Module State of the 
ET 200SP 
 
Task Description 
As a final diagnostic function, the state of the modules of the ET 200SP are to be read-out. This 
functionality is also implemented in the FB “FB_Diagnosis” with the help of the instruction 
“ModuleStates”. 
The evaluation of the status information of the individual modules is to take place through the 
data block “PROFINET_Diagnosis”. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 24
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Task Description: 
Reading-out the Module State of the ET200SP
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Diagnostics 
7-28 Training Document, V15.01.00 
7.13.1. Exercise 6: Reading-out the Module State of the ET 200SP 
 
Task 
You are to supplement your function block “FB_Diagnosis” by adding the function “ModuleStates” 
and you are to evaluate the state of the modules of the ET 200SP in it. Decide for yourself which 
mode you must use so that the status information displays which modules of the ET 200SP have 
failed and which are currently running without errors. 
The evaluationof the status information is carried out directly in the data block 
“PROFINET_Diagnosis” via the TIA Portal functionality “Monitor block” . 
What to Do 
1. Open the function block “FB_Diagnosis” and program the functionality. 
2. Download and test your programming. 
3. If necessary, make changes so that your program matches the task. 
4. Save your project. 
Note 
As required, use temporary as well as static variables in the function block! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 25
IK-TIAPN
Diagnostics
Exercise 6: 
Reading-out the Module State of the ET200SP
Read-out module 
state
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-1 
 
Contents 8 
 
 
 
 
 
8. Web Services PROFINET ....................................................................................... 8-2 
8.1. Diagnostics Anywhere, Anytime ........................................................................................... 8-3 
8.2. Activating the Web Server on the CPU ................................................................................. 8-4 
8.3. Access with HTTPS .............................................................................................................. 8-5 
8.4. Introduction Page & Web Server (Access Level: Minimum) ................................................. 8-6 
8.5. Web Server (Access Level: Administrative) .......................................................................... 8-7 
8.6. Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................ 8-8 
8.7. Diagnostic Buffer ................................................................................................................. 8-10 
8.8. Module Information ............................................................................................................. 8-11 
8.8.1. Firmware Update via Module Information ........................................................................... 8-12 
8.9. Alarms ................................................................................................................................. 8-13 
8.10. Communication Part1 ......................................................................................................... 8-14 
8.11. Communication Part2 ......................................................................................................... 8-15 
8.12. Set Topology ....................................................................................................................... 8-16 
8.13. Actual Topology .................................................................................................................. 8-17 
8.14. Topology and Module Information ...................................................................................... 8-18 
8.15. Reading the Tag Status ...................................................................................................... 8-19 
8.16. Writing the Tag Status ........................................................................................................ 8-20 
8.17. Reading the Watch Tables .................................................................................................. 8-21 
8.18. Writing the Watch Tables .................................................................................................... 8-22 
8.19. Online Backup of the PLC ................................................................................................... 8-23 
8.20. Customer Pages ................................................................................................................. 8-24 
8.21. Filebrowser .......................................................................................................................... 8-26 
8.22. DataLogs ............................................................................................................................. 8-28 
8.23. Task Description: Activating the Web Server of the S7-1513 and Uploading a Filebrowser 
File ...................................................................................................................................... 8-30 
8.23.1. Exercise 1: Activating the Web Server on the S7-1513 ...................................................... 8-31 
8.23.2. Exercise 2: Uploading a File onto the Filebrowser ............................................................. 8-32 
8.23.3. Exercise 3: Checking the File on the Memory Card ........................................................... 8-33 
8.24. Web Server CPU S7-1510SP - 1PN ................................................................................... 8-34 
8.25. Web Based Management (WBM) SCALANCE XC208....................................................... 8-35 
8.26. Cable Test ........................................................................................................................... 8-36 
8.27. Task Description: Activating the Web Server of the S7-1510SP + Cable Test via the 
SCALANCE XC208 Web Server ......................................................................................... 8-37 
8.27.1. Exercise 4: Activating the Web Server of the S7-1510SP .................................................. 8-38 
8.27.2. Exercise 5: Executing the Cable Tester Function in the Web Server of the SCALANCE 
XC208 ................................................................................................................................. 8-39 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8. Web Server 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Web Services PROFINET Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... be familiar with the possibilities of web diagnostics and be able 
to apply them
... understand the web server of the S7-1500
... be able to parameterize the web server of the S7-1500
... be familiar with the Web Based Management of a SCALANCE 
Switch
... be able to carry out a cable test via a SCALANCE Switch
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-3 
8.1. Diagnostics Anywhere, Anytime 
 
Diagnostics via the Web Server 
Available from everywhere and accessible at all times - this is what customers always expect 
from the diagnostics of systems. When the system is connected to the Internet via a router and 
taking into account the relevant security guidelines, you are one step closer to meeting these 
expectations. We are talking about the integrated web server on the S7-1500 and the S7-1200 as 
well as on most other SIMATIC products of the newest generation here. 
Via the web server, it is possible to operate diagnostics with only the help of a web browser. No 
further software or other aids are required. The different possibilities are explained in more exact 
detail in the following sections. 
Note 
On the Service & Support pages, you will find the download for the function manual about the 
web server of the S7-1500 under the Entry-ID: 59193560. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Diagnostics Anywhere, Anytime
Worldwide 
diagnostics
ID: 59193560
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.2. Activating the Web Server on the CPU 
 
Activating the Web Server 
In the CPU’s delivered condition, the web server is deactivated for security reasons. This can be 
activated with a few mouse clicks: 
• Select (highlight) the CPU either in the Device view or in the Network view 
• In the CPU Properties, select the section Web server 
• Activate the web server and set the desired update interval 
• Edit the User management• Compile the configuration and reload, 
Note 
In order to be able to access the web server, the access via the interface through which you want 
to reach the PLC web server must however, still be activated! 
The User management must be adjusted. By default, there is no administrator and every user of 
the web server only has minimum authorization! 
When activating the web server, the following pop-up window appears in which TIA Portal 
separately points out the need to take appropriate safety measures against manipulation from 
outside: 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Activating the Web Server on the CPU 
Activate 
web server
Properties
Controller
Automatic 
update
Eigenschaften
Schnittstelle
Zugriff auf 
Webserver 
aktivieren
Activate web 
server access
User 
management
Properties
Interface
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-5 
8.3. Access with HTTPS 
 
HTTPS – Secure Connection 
HTTPS stands for “Hyper Text Transfer Protocol Secure” and is used to transfer data tap-proof in 
the World Wide Web. This function can also be used for the SIMATIC web server. If the access to 
the web server is only to be possible using a secure connection, the relevant checkmark must be 
set for the option “Permit access only with HTTPS”. 
For an error-free HTTPS access to the SIMATIC, the following points must be ensured: 
• The current time-of-day must be set in the CPU. 
• The IP address of the CPU must be stipulated. 
• A valid certificate must be installed in the web browser. 
Certificate 
The certificate for the web server can be downloaded via the Introduction page and then installed 
in the web browser used. It is also possible to access the SIMATIC without an installed certificate 
if the option: “Continue to this website (not recommended)” is selected in the window that opens. 
This is only possible for S7-1500 controllers with FW < 2.0. 
You will find further information on this topic and on self-signed certificates in the Entry-ID 
103528224. 
Note 
Even if the checkmark is not set for the option “Permit access only with HTTPS”, you can always 
access the SIMATIC using HTTPS! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 5
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Access with HTTPS
Access only with 
HTTPS
Intro page 
web server
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.4. Introduction Page & Web Server (Access Level: Minimum) 
 
Introduction Page Web Server 
Through the IP address of the configured CPU, you can establish a connection to its web server 
after it was activated in the hardware configuration. The connection can be established either 
through a standard connection with the prefix “http://” or through a secure connection with the 
prefix “https://”. 
By default, the introduction page appears the first time the web server is accessed. Here there 
are links to the Industry Mall, to an Overview of the SIMATIC controllers, to the Service & Support 
pages and the possibility of downloading the certifcate for the HTTPS connection. 
If the option “Skip Intro” is activated, the introduction page is no longer displayed the next time the 
web server is accessed. It is then routed directly to the Start page of the web server. 
Start Page Web Server 
With minimum authorization, only the Start page on the web server of the CPU can be looked at. 
Without any authorization level, you (the user) only see(s) in which operating mode (e.g. RUN or 
STOP) the PLC is and which status it currently has. 
Note 
If, after activating the option “Skip Intro”, you wish to go back to the introduction page, it can be 
called by clicking on the link “Intro”. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 6
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Introduction Page & Web Server (Access Level: 
Minimum)
minimale
Berechtigungen
User log in
Minimum 
authorization
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-7 
8.5. Web Server (Access Level: Administrative) 
 
Authorizations Web Server 
The assignment of individual access authorizations for the web server user must be made in the 
Hardware configuration of the controller. 
By default, no user is set up and all accesses to the web server only have minimum authorization. 
In case not all authorizations are selected, the user is given limited authorization: 
 
In the following sections, as an example, the individual pages of the web server are displayed 
with administrative authorization. 
Start Page Web Server 
If the authorizations “flash LEDs” and “change operating mode” are assigned for the logged in 
user, he can let the LEDs of the Devices flash as well as set the operating mode to STOP or RUN 
on the Start page of the web server. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Web Server (Access Level: Administrative)
maximale
Berechtigungen
Maximum 
authorization
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.6. Diagnostics 
 
Diagnostics 
The "Diagnostics" web page of the web server is divided into five subcategories – "Identification", 
"Program protection", "Memory", "Runtime information" as well as "Fail-safe". 
Identification 
The "Identification" tab contains various general CPU characteristics such as the order number or 
the Firmware version which is currently loaded on the CPU. 
The information which is found in "Identification" can be entered in the general properties of the 
controller. 
Program Protection 
Here, you will find information about whether the PLC program contains a know-how protection or 
a copy protection. As soon as at least one block is present in the PLC that has a know-how 
protection, it is indicated here. The "Binding" information field indicates whether a copy protection 
is activated through the binding to the serial number of the CPU or the Memory Card for at least 
one block of the PLC program. 
Memory 
Here you will find current values on the memory utilization of the controller. This information is 
useful if larger expansions to the program are pending and you are unsure of how much memory 
space is currently still available on the CPU and on the memory card. 
 
 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2017
Seite 9
IK-TIAPN
Webdienste PROFINET
Diagnose
Identifikation
Laufzeitinfo
Programmschutz
Fehlersicher
Speicher
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-9 
Runtime Information 
You will find current information on program load, communication load and cycle time in the 
"Runtime information" tab. From this data you can determine whether runtime problems could 
possibly exist for the execution of the user program. 
Fail-safe 
The safety program of an F-CPU consists of one or two F-runtime groups. The F-runtime group’s 
signature, cycle times (F-monitoring time) and runtimes of these F-runtime groups can be found 
in the "Fail-safe" tab. 
Note 
The "Diagnostics" page is activated (enabled) through the authorization "query diagnostics": 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.7. Diagnostic Buffer 
 
Diagnostic Buffer 
You can look at the diagnostic buffer of the PLC on the web server via the “Diagnostic buffer” 
page. For every diagnostic buffer entry, there is a section with the detailed information on the 
currently selected entry underneath the list. 
A maximum of 50 entries is always displayed which can be selected viaa drop-down menu: 
 
The maximum number of diagnostic buffer entries can be taken from the technical data of the 
respective device. 
Note 
The “Diagnostic Buffer” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “query diagnostics”: 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 9
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Diagnostic Buffer
Selection of the entries 
to be displayed
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-11 
8.8. Module Information 
 
Module Information 
The state of the hardware components can be read-out in the web server via the “Module 
information” tab. The state of the CPU as well as the connected PROFINET IO-System and its 
components are displayed here. Through the “PROFINET IO-System” section, the diagnostics 
can be queried right down to the module level. 
Note 
The “Module information” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “query 
diagnostics”: 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 10
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Module Information
Opens further 
details
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.8.1. Firmware Update via Module Information 
 
Firmware Update 
If the user has the authorization to perform Firmware updates via the web server (see picture), 
this can be carried out via the Module information page. 
Via the Details view, in the “Firmware” tab, the Firmware downloaded from the Service & Support 
pages can be selected and then loaded into the module. 
Note 
The authorization "perform a firmware update" automatically also activates (enables) the 
authorization "change operating mode" as well as the authorization "query diagnostics": 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 11
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Firmware Update via Module Information
Necessary 
authorizations
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-13 
8.9. Alarms 
 
Alarms 
Via the “Alarms” page of the web server, all alarms can be displayed which are currently pending 
in the alarm buffer of the controller. These are displayed in the correct order of their occurrence 
with date and time. Alarms in the alarm window cannot be acknowledged via the web browser. 
In order to get the complete picture of error analysis, it is always recommended to look at the 
“Diagnostic buffer” page in addition to the “Alarms” page. 
Note 
The “Alarms” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “query diagnostics”: 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 12
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Alarms
Alarm buffer 
PLC
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.10. Communication Part1 
 
Communication 
On the “Communication” page of the web server, there are four subsections: 
• Parameter 
• Statistics 
• Resources 
• Connections 
Parameter 
Summarized information on the PROFINET and Ethernet interfaces of the associated CPU of the 
web server is found in the “Parameter” tab. 
Statistics 
In order to be able to look at the statistics of the data transmission via the interfaces, you can 
switch into the “Statistics” tab. Here, there is an overview of the sent and received data packages 
of the CPU interfaces and the total amount of sent and received packages. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 13
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Communication Part1
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-15 
8.11. Communication Part2 
 
Resources 
An overview of all connection resources in use, all connection resources not in use and the 
maximum possible connection resources is found in the “Resources” tab. 
Connections 
In the "State" section, there is an overview of the communication connections being established 
and the already established or set up connections. 
For each of these connections, the table contains information on the connection State, the Local 
ID, the Slot of the Gateway, the Remote address (IP address), the associated Remote address 
type, the Type of connection and the connection Type. 
Note 
The “Communication” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “query diagnostics”: 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 14
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Communication Part2
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.12. Set Topology 
 
Topology 
On the “Topology” web page, you are given information about the topological structure of the 
system. Differentiation is made between the Set(point) Topology and the Actual Topology. The 
Set Topology is only displayed if a topology was actually configured in the controller in TIA Portal. 
The Actual Topology, on the other hand, is always detected and presented in the web server. The 
“Topology” web page consists of the following tabs: 
• Graphic view 
• Table view 
• Status overview 
You can only switch between the Set and Actual Topology in the Graphic view. The Actual 
Topology is always presented in the Table view tab! Only the devices of the PROFINET-IO 
System of the CPU are displayed in the “Status overview” tab. 
Graphic View 
In the “Graphic view” tab, the topology of the system is graphically prepared and presented. You 
can switch here between the presentation format Set Topology and Actual Topology and so carry 
out a comparison between the project and the system. 
Status Overview 
In the “Status overview” tab, all devices of the PROFINET IO-System connected to the CPU are 
presented. Here, a quick overview of the state of the IO-System can be made without distractions 
resulting because of topological connection relationships. 
Note 
If a Set Topology is not configured in the CPU, all PROFINET-IO devices are simply presented in 
the “Graphic view” tab when the Set Topology is selected. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 15
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Set Topology
Sprung zum
Baugruppen-
zustand
Sprung zum
Baugruppen-
zustand
Jump to Module 
information
Status of all 
Devices of the 
IO-System
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-17 
8.13. Actual Topology 
 
Actual Topology 
The Actual Topology of the system can be displayed in two different formats – graphic and table. 
Table View 
In the Table view of the Actual Topology, not only the real connections between the devices are 
displayed but also the statuses of the individual devices. Differentiation is made between the four 
following statuses which can be presented: 
• Configured and accessible PROFINET device 
• Not configured and accessible PROFINET device 
• Configured but not accessible PROFINET device 
• Device for which no ‘neighborhood’ relationships 
can be detected or the ‘neighborhood’ relationships are not 
complete or can only be read-out with errors. 
Note 
The “Topology” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “query diagnostics”: 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Actual Topology
Zustand
Devices
Zustand
Devices
Zustand
Devices
Zustand
Devices
Zustand
Devices
State of Devices
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.14. Topology and Module Information 
 
Switch to the Module Information 
With a mouse-click on the State symbol of the represented device, you can switch to the 
associated Module information. That is, the web server page “Module information” is 
automaticallyopened with the correct Device and the error source can be analyzed! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Topology and Module Information
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-19 
8.15. Reading the Tag Status 
 
Tag Status 
In the web server, the status of the tags defined in the controller can be monitored via the “Tag 
status” page. Only a symbolic addressing is permitted. Absolute addresses cannot be monitored 
via the “Tag status”. Tags from all tag tables defined in the project can be monitored. 
When you exit the “Tag status” page, any tags which have been entered are not stored. That is, 
the next time the page is opened, the page will be empty. If you want to keep the configuration of 
the tags to be monitored, you either have to create a bookmark in the browser for the configured 
tag status or you have to save the address line from the browser. That way you can re-access the 
same tag configuration. 
Note 
The “Tag status” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “read tag status”: 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 18
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Reading the Tag Status
Value at time of 
update
Tag tables of the 
controller
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-20 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.16. Writing the Tag Status 
 
Write Tag Status 
On the “Tag status” page in the web server of the CPU, the authorization “write tag status” 
permits you not only to read out the value of tags but also to change the value of these tags via 
the web server. 
However, you can still only use tags which have been declared symbolically in the controller. 
Note 
It is possible to only activate the authorization “write tag status”. However, this doesn’t make 
sense since the “Tag status” menu item only appears in the web server when the authorization 
“read tag status” has been assigned! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 19
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Writing the Tag Status
erlaubt das Wert 
ändern im
Variablenstatus
Permits you to 
change values in 
the tag status
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-21 
8.17. Reading the Watch Tables 
 
Watch Tables 
On the “Watch tables” page of the web server, you can also use the watch tables created in the 
project for the controller for the web server. For this, the tables which are also to be displayed in 
the web server must be added in the hardware configuration of the controller under the “Web 
server” menu item and there under Watch tables. 
Currently, only a read-only access to these tables is possible. That is, these cannot be expanded 
via the web server. 
In addition, the tags in the table can only be read and not controlled (written) via the Watch tables 
in the web server, unlike the Watch tables in the project. 
If there are absolute addresses without symbol in the symbol table which is displayed in the web 
server, then no current values are displayed for these in the Watch tables in the web server. This 
contrasts with Watch tables in the project where absolute addresses without symbol can also be 
monitored. 
Note 
The number of Watch tables which can be monitored in the web server depends on the size of 
the SIMATIC Memory Card used. When the existing memory space is exceeded by configured 
alarms and tags, Watch tables in the web browser are only partially displayed. 
The “Watch tables” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “read tags”: 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 20
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Reading the Watch Tables
Without a 
symbol, no value 
can be 
presented
Eigenschaften
Steuerung
Properties 
Controller
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-22 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.18. Writing the Watch Tables 
 
Write Tags 
If the user is assigned the authorization “write tags”, it is now also possible for him, on the “Watch 
tables” page, to change the value of the tags in this table. 
Note 
So that it is possible to change the values of tags in a Watch table, this must be set in the web 
server settings of the controller: 
 
It is possible to only activate the authorization “write tags”. However, this doesn’t make sense 
since the “Watch tables” menu item only appears in the web server when the authorization “read 
tags” has been assigned! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 21
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Writing the Watch Tables
erlaubt das Wert 
ändern in 
Beobachtungstabellen
Permits values to be 
changed in Watch 
tables
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-23 
8.19. Online Backup of the PLC 
 
Online Backup 
The web server of the controller enables the user to create or to restore (load) a backup of the 
controller without having to start and operate TIA Portal. Requirement for this, of course, is the 
appropriate authorization that must be assigned to the user. 
Any number of backups of the controller can be created and as a result different configurations 
can be kept for one CPU. 
Note 
An online backup of the controller is only possible in the "STOP" mode. For that reason, in 
addition to the right to create or restore an online backup, the user must also be assigned the 
right to change the operating mode. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 22
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Online-Sicherung der PLC
Online-Sicherung nur 
in Stopp der CPU 
möglich
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-24 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.20. Customer Pages 
 
Customer Pages 
In the "Customer pages" area of the web server, HTML pages, which you yourself create, can be 
displayed. 
On these pages, tags of the controller can be read and written. The pages are generated and 
edited with an HTML editor. Then TIA Portal generates data blocks (Web-Control-DB and 
Fragment-DBs) from these pages which are loaded into the controller. Using the instruction 
“WWW”, the web server of the controller is then synchronized and initialized with the user 
program. The first call of the instruction “WWW” generates the link to the customer pages on the 
web server of the CPU (see picture). A click on the link then starts the customer pages in a new 
browser window. 
 
 
Note 
The “Customer pages” page is activated (enabled) through the authorizations “open user-defined 
web pages” as well as “write in user-defined web pages”. With the authorization “write in user-
defined web pages”, the authorization “open user-defined web pages” is also automatically 
assigned: 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 23
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Customer Pages
ID: 68011496
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-25 
An entry which deals with customer pages on the S7-1500 in more detail can be found on the 
Service & Support pages under the Entry-ID: 68011496. 
Important 
Writing accesses in customer pages can influence the process parameters and with that the 
operation of the CPU. 
For that reason, it is strongly recommended that a password is always assigned in the User 
management for users with write-access in customer pages to protect against manipulations from 
outside! 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-26 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.21. Filebrowser 
 
Filebrowser 
The “Filebrowser” page is activated (enabled) through the authorization “read files”. Via the web 
browser, you can now lookat which additional files are on the SIMATIC Memory Card in the CPU 
and open them. This is very helpful, for example, for commissioning or for service calls, since 
additional information material such as manuals, system descriptions and similar can be stored 
here. 
With the authorization “write/delete files”, additional authorizations are activated (enabled). These 
include: 
• The uploading of files to the SIMATIC Memory Card of the controller 
• The deleting of files on the SIMATIC Memory Card 
• The renaming of files on the SIMATIC Memory Card 
All these authorizations refer to the “Filebrowser” in the web server of the controller! Of course, it 
is always possible to write, to delete or to rename files by inserting the SIMATIC Memory Card of 
the CPU into a card reader, regardless of the user authorizations in the web server! 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 24
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Filebrowser
Upload/
Delete/Change 
permitted
Activate 
Filebrowser
Uploaded 
manuals
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-27 
Note 
The authorization “write/delete files” does not yet activate the menu item “Filebrowser” in the web 
server: 
 
The File server is only activated with the authorization “read files”. 
The program files which are generated when the project is downloaded onto the controller are not 
displayed in the File browser for security reasons. 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-28 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.22. DataLogs 
 
DataLogs 
The “DataLogs” page on the web server makes it possible to look at the “DataLogs” generated via 
the program and to store it on your local computer. Since a local temporary copy is generated on 
the computer when the Log file is opened via the web server, you can still save information in this 
Log file from the controller side. The format in which the Log files are generated is the CSV 
format (comma separated values). 
Via the web server, the Log files present on the controller can also be emptied, if the 
authorization “write/delete files” was assigned. However, the Log files are not completely deleted 
from the SIMATIC Memory Card through this action. Only the contents, that is, the entries of the 
Log file are deleted. This action is however not possible if the selected Log file is still open in the 
controller! 
DataLogs in the Filebrowser 
If there are Log files on the SIMATIC Memory Card, they are also displayed on the “Filebrowser” 
page in a separate folder. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 25
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
DataLogs
Upload -
Delete - Change
Activate DataLogs
page
ID: 59193101
Empty Logfile
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-29 
Note 
The “DataLogs” page uses the same authorizations as the “Filebrowser” page: 
 
On the Service & Support pages, you will find a document which covers the structure and use of 
the CPU memory of the S7-1500 under the Entry-ID: 59193101. This PDF also contains a 
chapter which deals with the topic of data logging and also includes a small programming 
example. 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-30 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.23. Task Description: Activating the Web Server of the 
S7-1513 and Uploading a Filebrowser File 
 
Task Description 
You are to activate the web server of the S7-1513. You are then to create a new User and assign 
him the necessary rights so that he can use the Filebrowser. You can assign any user name and 
password you like. Finally, you are to load a file, such as, your archived project onto the memory 
card of the controller via the Filebrowser of the web server. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 26
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Task Description: Activating the Web Server of the 
S7-1513 and Uploading a Filebrowser File
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-31 
8.23.1. Exercise 1: Activating the Web Server on the S7-1513 
 
Task 
You are to activate the web server on the S7-1513 controller. Then, you are to set up a new User. 
Make sure that he has the necessary authorizations so that he can load files onto the File server 
of the web browser and, with that, onto the SD card of the controller. 
What to Do 
1. Activate the web server on the controller. 
2. Activate the option: “Permit access only with HTTPS”. 
3. Create a new User and assign the required authorizations as stated in the task. 
4. Save your project. 
5. Download your changes into the controller. 
Note 
Don’t forget to check whether the access to the web server via the desired interface is also 
activated. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 27
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Exercise 1: 
Activating the Web Server on the S7-1513
Activate 
web server
Create new user
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-32 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.23.2. Exercise 2: Uploading a File onto the Filebrowser 
 
Task 
Via the web server, with the help of the Filebrowser, you are to upload any file from your 
computer onto the SD card of the controller. 
Recommendation: Archive your project and then upload it into the controller. 
What to Do 
1. Open your Internet Explorer (a browser of your choice). 
2. Open the web server of the controller. 
3. Log in to the web server using the previously created User. 
4. Open the Filebrowser. 
5. Upload any file, via the Filebrowser, onto the SD card of the controller. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 28
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Exercise 2: Uploading a File onto the Filebrowser
Uploaded file
Upload file to 
SD card
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-33 
8.23.3. Exercise 3: Checking the File on the Memory Card 
 
Task 
You are to check whether the upload of your file really worked. You are to remove the SD card 
from the controller and insert it in the SD card reader on your Field-PG (left side). Then, with the 
Windows Explorer, you are to check whether your uploaded file is on the SD card. After that, you 
are to re-insert the card in the controller and start the controller. 
What to Do 
1. Remove the SD card from the controller. 
2. Insert the SD card in the card reader of your Field-PG (left side). 
3. With the help of the Windows Explorer, check whether your file is on the SD card. 
4. If it is not on the SD card, repeat the previous exercise! 
5. If the file is on the SD card, remove the card from the Field-PG and re-insert it in the controller. 
6. Start the PLC. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 29
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Exercise 3: Checking the File on the Memory Card
File was uploaded 
onto the card
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-34 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.24. Web Server CPU S7-1510SP - 1PN 
 
Web Server CPU 1510SP - 1PN 
From its handling, the web server of the CPU S7-1510SP - 1PN is not different from the web 
server of the CPU S7-1513 - 1PN or from that of another CPU. The basic settings, such as, 
activating the web server, setting up the User authorizations, setting the accessibility of the web 
server, etc. are exactly identical! 
The web servers of the various controllers can differ regarding which authorizations can be 
activated (enabled) for the different Users. 
Below is a comparison between the possible authorizations for an S7-1513 - 1PN V1.7 (left) and 
the S7-1513 - 1PN V1.8 (right):Unlike an S7-1513 - 1PN V1.7, an S7-1513 - 1PN V1.8 also permits the writing of tags and the 
writing of tag statuses. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 30
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Web Server CPU 1510SP-1PN
Administrative 
authorizations
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-35 
8.25. Web Based Management (WBM) SCALANCE XC208 
 
Web Based Management (WBM) SCALANCE XC208 
IE Switches have an integrated HTTP-Server for the Web Based Management. If an IE switch is 
addressed via a web browser, it returns HTML pages to the client computer depending on the 
user inputs. 
The user enters his configuration data into the HTML pages sent by the IE switch. An IE switch 
evaluates this information and dynamically generates answer pages. The particular advantage of 
this functional principle is that no special software except a web browser is required on the client 
side. 
Requirements for a WEB 
So that the Web Based Management of an Industrial Ethernet switch can be used, at least the 
following requirements must be fulfilled: 
• An IE switch must have and IP address so that you can use the Web Based 
Management. 
• In order to be able to use the Web Based Management, an Ethernet connection between 
the IE switch and the client computer must exist. 
• It is recommended that you use a current browser. 
• All pages of the Web Based Management require JavaScript. For that reason, make sure 
that JavaScript is activated in the browser settings. 
• Since the Web Based Management is HTTP or HTTPS-based, you must enable the 
access to Port 80 or 443 when a firewall is installed. 
Note 
The browser must not be setup in such a way that it is to reload the page from the server every 
time the page is accessed. The currentness of the dynamic page contents is ensured through 
other mechanisms. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 31
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Web Based Management (WBM) SCALANCE XC208
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-36 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.26. Cable Test 
 
Cable Test 
Via the SCALANCE XC208, you can carry out an error diagnosis of the cables on the individual 
electrical Ethernet ports. This option is called "Cable Tester" and is found in the Web Based 
Management in the menu "System" and there under the entry "Port Diagnostics". This makes it 
possible to localize short-circuits and cable interruptions. 
This function is not possible for IRT devices. 
In order to be able to carry out the error diagnosis, the Ethernet cable must be plugged into the 
SCALANCE XC208. However, there must not be any physical connection (link) to another 
network component. That is, the other cable end must not be connected! 
Then the port, to which the cable is connected, is selected via the Web Based Management and 
the test is performed. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 32
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Cable Test
Port selection
Cable must not 
be connected
Cable error-free 
and connected
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-37 
8.27. Task Description: Activating the Web Server of the S7-1510SP 
+ Cable Test via the SCALANCE XC208 Web Server 
 
Task Description 
You are to activate the web server of the S7-1510SP CPU and become familiar with its user 
interface. Then you are to switch into the WBM of the SCALANCE XC208 and there carry out a 
cable test for all cables connected to the SCALANCE XC208! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 33
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Task Description: Web Server of the S7-1510SP + 
Cable Test via SCALANCE XC208 Web Server
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
8-38 Training Document, V15.01.00 
8.27.1. Exercise 4: Activating the Web Server of the S7-1510SP 
 
Task 
You are to activate the web server of the S7-1510SP controller and compare its user interface 
and options with the web server of the S7-1513 SPS. 
What to Do 
1. Switch to the Devices view of the S7-1510SP. 
2. Activate the web server of the controller and also make sure that it is accessible via the 
connected PROFINET interface. 
3. Create a new User with an “administrative” access level. 
4. Download the changes into the controller. 
5. Start the Internet Explorer and call the web server of the controller via its IP address. 
6. Log in to the web server using the newly created User. 
7. Test the functionalities of the web server such as “Diagnostic Buffer”, “Module information” as 
well as “Topology” and compare these to the web server of the S7-1513 which you already 
know. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 34
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Exercise 4: 
Activating the Web Server of the S7-1510SP
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Web Services 
Training Document, V15.01.00 8-39 
8.27.2. Exercise 5: Executing the Cable Tester Function in the Web Server of the 
SCALANCE XC208 
 
Task 
Via your web browser, you are to call the function ‘Cable Tester’ in the Web Based Management 
of the SCALANCE XC208. Then you are to test all cables connected to the SCALANCE XC208 
for their length and their functioning. 
What to Do 
1. Open the Web Based Management of the SCALANCE XC208 in your web browser. 
2. Log in to the Web Based Management as Administrator. 
3. Switch to the Cable Tester function in the WBM of the SCALANCE XC208. 
4. Carry out a wire test/cable test for all cables connected to the switch. 
5. After that, you can still become familiar with the other options of the Web Based Management 
of the switch. 
Note 
In their delivered condition, most Siemens IE switches have the default administrator access: 
admin / admin. That is, both the User name and the User password for administrative 
authorizations on the switch is "admin". It is imperative that this is adjusted to your own needs 
when the switch is commissioned in a system! This is the only way to prevent an unauthorized 
access to the switch and with that the system! 
Newer switches of the SCALANCE family automatically 
prompt the user to assign a new password after the first 
Administrator login! 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 34
IK-TIAPN
Web Services PROFINET
Exercise 4: 
Activating the Web Server of the S7-1510SP
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-1 
 
Contents 9 
 
 
 
 
 
9. Ring Redundancy MRP .......................................................................................... 9-2 
9.1. Ring Topology ....................................................................................................................... 9-3 
9.2. MRP – Media Redundancy Protocol ..................................................................................... 9-4 
9.3. Operation of an MRP Ring .................................................................................................... 9-5 
9.4. Controlling the Ring with the MRP Manager ......................................................................... 9-6 
9.5. Detecting a Defective Ring Line............................................................................................ 9-7 
9.6. Restoring the Defective Ring Line ........................................................................................ 9-8 
9.7. MRP Options on the S7-1513 ............................................................................................... 9-9 
9.8. Domain Settings .................................................................................................................. 9-10 
9.9. Watchdog Time ...................................................................................................................9-11 
9.10. Task Description: Introducing a Loop and then Activating MRP ....................................... 9-12 
9.10.1. Exercise 1: Introducing a Loop ........................................................................................... 9-13 
9.10.2. Exercise 2: Activating MRP with the S7-1513 as MRP Manager ....................................... 9-14 
9.10.3. Exercise 3: Running Light for Visualizing the Re-configuration Times ............................... 9-15 
9.10.4. Exercise 4: Adjusting the Watchdog Time .......................................................................... 9-16 
9.11. Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 9-17 
9.11.1. MRP Manager (Auto) .......................................................................................................... 9-18 
9.11.2. MRP on the SCALANCE XC208 ......................................................................................... 9-19 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9. Ring Redundancy MRP 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Ring Redundancy MRP Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... understand what a ‘Loop’ is and why it must be avoided without 
MRP
... be able to configure and parameterize MRP
... be familiar with and understand the functional principle of MRP
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-3 
9.1. Ring Topology 
 
Ring Topology without Redundancy Protocol 
If devices are connected to one another in the Ethernet, it is important to avoid introducing a ring, 
also called a loop, between the devices. If this should accidently happen circling telegrams 
suddenly result within the network. This is especially the case when a device sends a broadcast 
in the loop which is then forwarded by every additional device. Since the ring / loop is not 
terminated, the broadcast now circles in the ring. With several circling telegrams, the load is then 
so high that the network collapses and no more communication is possible via the network! This 
can happen within seconds of a ring being introduced but it can also take several minutes. A 
collapse of communication is, however, unavoidable with a ring without a redundancy protocol! 
Furthermore, even when the loop is dissolved, it may be necessary to disconnect network 
devices from the network before they can then be registered again on the network. 
Redundancy Protocols / Ring Protocols 
To prevent the circling of data telegrams, redundancy protocols are used in the ring. These have 
different ways of working; however, they all have the same effect: the loop is dissolved and only if 
required, that is, with the failure of a cable, is the loop closed once more. 
In automation, the protocol MRP (Media Redundancy Protocol) is often used. This protocol is part 
of the PROFINET specification. 
Note 
On the Service & Support pages, you will find an entry under the EntryID: 33696406 which takes 
a closer look at the topic of ring redundancy with the Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP). 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Ring Topology
ID: 33696406
A LOOP is 
introduced
Circling 
telegrams
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.2. MRP – Media Redundancy Protocol 
 
The Ring Redundancy Procedure MRP 
The Media Redundancy Protocol (MRP) is a standardized redundancy protocol for automation 
and is specified in the standard IEC 61158 Type 10 “PROFINET”. Similar to STP or RSTP 
((Rapid) Spanning Tree Protocol), the protocol is established on Layer 2 of the OSI-layer model. 
The goal of ring redundancy procedures is to increase the availability of the system. This is 
achieved by introducing an alternative route for the telegram traffic. So that circling telegrams 
cannot be introduced via this alternative route, the route which the telegrams can take must be 
managed. In a ring, this task is handled by the “Manager”. In an MRP ring, it is also called MRP 
Manager. All other devices in a ring are referred to as “Clients”. The ports at which the individual 
devices of the ring are connected to one another are referred to as “ring ports”. 
Note 
Whether a device can take on the role of “Manager”, “Client” or “both” in a ring can be found in 
the device specifications. As soon as a device can take on the role of MRP Manager, it is also 
usually possible to define this device as an MRP Client. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
MRP – Media Redundancy Protocol
As a rule, PLCs 
can take on both 
roles
Standard: EC 61158 Type 10 "PROFINET"
Devices in an MRP Ring can take on the role of either Manager or Client
As a rule, 
distributed I/Os
can only be a client
As a rule, Managed 
Switches can take 
on both roles
As a rule, Panels 
can only be a client
All devices of an MRP ring must support 
MRP and MRP must be activated
Response times of <= 200ms for a device 
number <= 50 devices
Each Ring must include at least one 
MRP Manager
Connection of the devices must only take 
place via the ring ports
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-5 
9.3. Operation of an MRP Ring 
 
Requirements MRP Ring 
Requirements for smooth operation with the Media Redundancy Protocol MRP are: 
• The ring in which MRP is used must only consist of devices which support this function. 
• "MRP" must be activated for all devices in the ring. 
• All devices must be connected to one another via their ring ports. 
• There must be at least one redundancy manager (Role "Manager (Auto)"). 
• If there is one device in the ring that has the role “Manager”, no further devices with the role 
“Manager” or “Manager (Auto)” may be in this ring! 
• The ring may consist of a maximum of 50 devices. Otherwise, re-configuration time of greater 
than or equal to 200ms can result. 
• All partner ports within the ring must have the same settings. 
Re-configuration Time 
The re-configuration time is the time which the manager in an MRP Ring requires to detect a 
cable failure and to switch the alternative route for the telegrams active. This time can be up to a 
maximum of 200ms. 
Conditions 
• RT operation is possible when MRP is used. 
• The IRT operation is not possible in conjunction with MRP. 
• The TCP/IP communication is possible in conjunction with MRP, since lost data packets are 
repeatedly sent, if necessary. 
• Prioritized startup and the use of MRP is not possible. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 5
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Operation of an MRP Ring
Redundant line 
(really exists!)
ET200SP is defined 
as Client
Scalance is defined 
as Client
TP700 is defined as 
Client
MRP Manager 
separates the ring 
at a port
Controller is defined 
as Manager
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.4. Controlling the Ring with the MRP Manager 
 
The Way the MRP Manager Works 
The task of the manager is to monitor the ring topology. 
During normal operation of the ring, that is, without ring interruption due to an error, the 
redundancy manager separates its two ring ports from one another so that the ring topology 
becomes a line from the point of view of communication. As soon as the ring is open because of 
the failure of a device or a cable break and the data communication is no longer ensured, the 
redundancy manager re-configures the data routes within 200ms. For this, it connects its tworing 
ports through and creates a new linear network structure through this replacement route. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 6
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Controlling the Ring with the MRP Manager
MRP Manager 
sendet 
Testtelegramm
Testtelegramm 
wird an beiden 
Ports versendet
During operation, test telegrams 
are sent in parallel to both ports 
and must be received at both
Test telegram is 
sent to both ports
MRP Manager 
sends test 
telegram
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-7 
9.5. Detecting a Defective Ring Line 
 
Detecting a Defective Ring Line 
Test telegrams are used to detect a defective ring line. 
The redundancy manager monitors the ring for interruptions. For this, it sends test telegrams from 
both ring port 1 and ring port 2. The test telegrams pass through the ring in both directions until 
they arrive at the respective other ring port of the redundancy manager (see picture). If the ring is 
interrupted, either due to the failure of the connection between two devices or even due to the 
failure of an entire device, the sent test telegrams of the one ring port no longer reach the other 
ring port. Through this procedure, the MRP Manager can detect an interruption of the ring and 
then connect through its ring ports. 
So that the devices in the ring do not try to send their telegrams to other devices via the defective 
line but also take the “new” route, MRP Manager sends ARP delete telegrams to each device. 
These delete the Forwarding Database (FDB) of the switches so that the new accessibility of the 
existing devices is learned. Subsequently, the devices send the telegrams via the replacement 
line. 
Note 
Unlike PROFIBUS, the electrical failure of a device in PROFINET also causes the failure of the 
communication path via this device. Due to the failure of the device, the switch of the device also 
fails. Incoming telegrams can then no longer be forwarded! 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Detecting a Defective Ring Line
Test telegram traffic is 
terminated
Cable break between 2 
devicesRedundant line is 
switched active
MRP Manager detects 
that no more test 
telegrams are received
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.6. Restoring the Defective Ring Line 
 
Restoring the Defective Ring Line 
As soon as the interruption is eliminated, the original transmission routes are re-established, the 
two ring ports in the redundancy manager are separated from one another and the redundancy 
clients are informed of the change. The redundancy clients then go back to using the original 
routes to the other devices. Just as for the line failure, this is also implemented by sending delete 
telegrams from the MRP Manager. 
The Manager once again sends ARP delete telegrams and so deletes the FDB of the MRP 
clients. Subsequently, they once again learn the “old” telegram route to all devices. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 8
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Restoring the Defective Ring Line
Test telegram traffic 
can circulate once 
more
Defective line was 
exchanged
Redundant line is 
switched to Standby 
once again
MRP Manager detects 
that test telegrams are 
once again arriving
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-9 
9.7. MRP Options on the S7-1513 
 
MRP Options 
The settings for MRP are made in the PROFINET interface of the device. There, the entry “Media 
redundancy” is located, where the MRP functionality of the controller can be parameterized. If the 
selected device does not support the ring redundancy procedure MRP, this entry does not exist in 
the Advanced options. 
The following items are found under the entry “Media redundancy”: 
• The MRP Domains to which the Device is currently assigned. This can be changed in the 
Network view. 
• The Media redundancy role of the device. The drop-down menu for this entry differs 
depending on the possible roles for the device. 
The device can be both “Manager” and “Client”: 
 
The device can only take on the role of a “Client”: 
 
• The ring ports, via which the device is connected with the MRP Ring, are displayed here. If 
the Device has more than two PROFINET ports, the ports presented here must be 
connected with the ring! 
• If the option “Diagnostic interrupts” is to be activated, the Device signals further diagnostic 
interrupts, such as, wiring or port errors, a neighbor of the ring port does not support MRP, 
ring interruptions and ring restoration, …. Redundancy managers signal more diagnostic 
interrupts than clients. 
• You can switch to the settings of the MRP Domains in the Network view via the button 
“Domain settings”. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 10
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
MRP Options on the S7-1513
Properties 
Interface
MRP Domains
MRP Role
Ring ports CPU
Diagnostics interrupt
Further Domain 
settings
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.8. Domain Settings 
 
MRP Domains 
In the Network view, the settings for the MRP domains present in the PROFINET IO-System can 
be made. 
Here, you get an overview as well as change possibilities for the following settings: 
• How many MRP Domains are present in the selected IO-Network and which domains the 
Default Domains represent are displayed. 
• For each Domain, further information, such as, the number of interfaces within the ring, the 
number of managers, etc. is presented: 
 
• The IO-Network, to which the MRP Domain is assigned, is displayed. 
• Devices which are members of the selected Domains. Here, the associated Domain of the 
individual Devices as well as their role in the MRP Domain can additionally be adjusted and 
changed. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 11
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Domain Settings
MRP-Domäne
Setting for Default 
Domains
MRP role of the 
devices
Devices in the 
ring
MRP Domains
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-11 
9.9. Watchdog Time 
 
Watchdog time 
In the menu item “Watchdog” in the PROFINET interface of an IO-Device, you will find the item 
“Accepted update cycles without IO data”. Since the changeover times, in the MRP operation, 
between the defective line and the replacement line can be up to 200ms in the Worst Case, this 
number must be adjusted if you wish to have a smooth changeover. 
With the default setting of 3 accepted update cycles without IO data, the IO-Device always goes 
into fault for an MRP changeover and the outputs are briefly de-energized. With an increased 
number of update cycles, the IO-Device does not “notice” the breakdown of the line and the 
outputs continue to have power. Of course, during the changeover time, the IO-Controller cannot 
control the IO-Device. 
Note 
If the watchdog time is changed, you always have to check whether a critical IO-Device state can 
occur in the selected time frame! If this is the case, a shorter time must be selected! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 12
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Watchdog Time
Ansprechüber-
wachungszeit
Watchdog time
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.10. Task Description: 
Introducing a Loop and then Activating MRP 
 
Task Description 
In order to become more familiar with the MRP and rings in networks, you are first of all to 
introduce a ring to your system and then modify the introduced ring into an MRP ring in orderto 
achieve the required ring redundancy. 
Finally, you are to program a running light on the ET 200SP so that the re-configuration times of 
the MRP ring can be visualized. 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Ring Redundancy MRP Page 14 Siemens AG © 2016
Task Description: 
Introducing a Loop and then Activating MRP
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-13 
9.10.1. Exercise 1: Introducing a Loop 
 
Task 
With the help of the SCALANCE XC208, you are to introduce a ring which includes the following 
devices: 
• S7-1513 
• ET 200SP 
• TouchPanel 
• SCALANCE XC208 Switch 
What to Do 
1. Take two suitably long PROFINET cables. 
2. Connect the Port “P1” of your S7-1500 training case to the Port “P5” of the SCALANCE 
switch. 
3. Then connect the Port “P2” of your S7-1500 training case to the Port “P3” of the SCALANCE 
switch. 
4. Monitor how the system goes into fault. 
Note 
The system must go into fault in any case. If this is not the case, check all PROFINET 
connections of the above-mentioned devices. These must all be connected to one another! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 14
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Exercise 1: Introducing a Loop
Es entsteht ein 
Loop!
A loop is 
introduced!
neue LeitungNew line
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.10.2. Exercise 2: Activating MRP with the S7-1513 as MRP Manager 
 
Task 
In your project, you are to activate the MRP functionality for all devices that are part of the ring. 
For this, the S7-1500 is to take on the role of “Manager”. All other devices of the ring are given 
the role of “Client”. 
What to Do 
1. Switch to the Topology view. 
2. Update the offline topology of your project. For this, use either the Offline/Online comparison 
function or enter the connections manually. 
3. Switch to the Network view in your project. 
4. Define the roles of the devices either individually via the various PROFINET interfaces of the 
devices or collectively via the MRP Domain settings of the IO-Network. 
5. Download the modified configuration to all necessary devices. 
6. Test the MRP functionality. 
Note 
Before you can once again access the controller, you must dissolve the loop! 
The role of the TP700 Comfort cannot be set via the MRP Domain in the Network view. For this, 
you must switch to the PROFINET interface Properties of the Panel. 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 15
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Exercise 2: 
Activating MRP with the S7-1513 as MRP Manager
PLC is MRP 
Manager
HMI muss separat
auf Client umgestellt
werden
HMI must separately be 
changed over to Client 
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-15 
9.10.3. Exercise 3: Running Light for Visualizing the Re-configuration Times 
 
Task 
You are to use the “RunningLight_ET 200SP” block from the IK-TIAPN library in order to generate 
a running light on the ET 200SP. This running light improves the visual presentation of the re-
configuration times of the MRP ring. 
What to Do 
1. Open the “IK-TIAPN” library, if it is closed. 
2. Using drag & drop, copy the “Running Light” tag table into your project. 
3. Then drag the “RunningLight_ET200SP” block from the “Chapter9” folder into your project. 
4. Compile and download your project. Then save it. 
5. Once again test the MRP functionality with the help of the running light. The running light is 
switched on and switched off via the input “S_Runninglight_On” (%I 0.7). 
The re-configuration times which the Manager requires should now be easier to recognize. 
Note 
The library is stored in the following path: “C:\Archives\TIA_Portal\IK-TIAPN”. There, it is either 
archived (zipped) and must first still be retrieved (unzippped) or it is already retrieved and only 
has to be opened. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Exercise 3: Running Light for Visualizing the 
Re-configuration Times
Running light 
from the library
Insert in the 
project
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.10.4. Exercise 4: Adjusting the Watchdog Time 
 
Task 
You are to change the “Watchdog time” option of the PROFINET interface of all required IO-
Devices in such a way that a smooth changeover is ensured. That is, when a ring line is pulled 
and inserted, the breakdown of the running light is no longer to be recognized. 
What to Do 
1. Switch to the Network view of your project. 
2. Change the “Accepted update cycles without IO data” of all required IO-Devices in such a way 
that these correspond to the task. 
3. Compile and download your project. Then save it. 
4. Test whether your changes ensure a smooth changeover. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
Exercise 4: Adjusting the Watchdog Time
Adjust the update 
cycles
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-17 
9.11. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to complete a topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Ringredundanz MRP Seite 19 Siemens AG © 2016
Wenn Sie noch mehr wissen wollen
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN - Ring Redundancy MRP 
9-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
9.11.1. MRP Manager (Auto) 
 
MRP Manager (Auto) 
If it is not necessary to have a fixed redundancy manager in the MRP Ring, the function “Manager 
(Auto)” can be used. If this role is assigned to several devices of the MRP Ring, then at runtime, 
there is a negotiation amongst these devices as to which device takes on the role of redundancy 
manager and which one(s) takes on the role of “Client”. 
The advantage of this method is that when the negotiated redundancy manager fails during 
running operation, one of the other MRP Ring devices that had been given the role of “Client” 
during the negotiation can step into the position of the failed redundancy manager and can take 
on the role of “Manager (Auto)”. When the failed redundancy manager is restored, the role of 
“Manager (Auto)” is then once again negotiated between the devices concerned. 
If only one device is assigned the role of “Manager (Auto)” in the MRP Ring, it naturally takes on 
the role of redundancy manager. 
Note 
If a device of the MRP Ring is assigned the role of “Manager”, then no other device may be given 
the role “Manager (Auto)” or “Manager”! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 19
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
MRP Manager (Auto)
MRP Manager role is 
negotiated at runtime
MRP Manager Rolle wird 
zur Laufzeit ausgehandelt
Both devices are set to 
Manager (Auto)
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Ring Redundancy MRP 
Training Document, V15.01.00 9-19 
9.11.2. MRP on the SCALANCE XC208 
 
MRP on the SCALANCE XC208 
The SCALANCE XC208 Switch offers the same functionality as an S7-1513. Furthermore, it also 
offers a support for other ring redundancy procedures, such as, HRP. 
 
 
Alternative Redundancy 
Unlike the S7-1513, the SCALANCE XC208 can also be parameterized via alternative 
mechanisms such as the Web Based Management, WBM, or via the Simple Network 
Management Protocol, SNMP. This is also true for the Media Redundancy. This is either 
parameterized via the PROFINET IO Settings via the S7 controller or via the WBM. If a 
parameterization via the WBM is desired, the option must be activated in the Settings of the 
SCALANCE XC208. Then all options are ‘greyed out’ and the parameterizations can bedone via 
the Web Based Management. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 20
IK-TIAPN
Ring Redundancy MRP
MRP on the SCALANCE XC208
Client or Manager role 
possible
Ring ports can be set
Redundanz alternativ 
einstellbar (z.B. WBM oder 
SNMP)
Redundancy can 
alternatively be set (e.g. 
WBM or SNMP)
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-1 
 
Contents 10 
 
 
 
 
 
10. Shared Device ....................................................................................................... 10-2 
10.1. Traditional System Expansion ............................................................................................ 10-3 
10.2. Alternative System Expansion ............................................................................................ 10-4 
10.3. Module-by-Module Shared Device...................................................................................... 10-5 
10.3.1. Parameterizing the Module-by-Module Shared Device ...................................................... 10-6 
10.4. Submodule-by-Submodule Shared Device ......................................................................... 10-8 
10.4.1. Configuring the Submodule-by-Submodule Shared Device ............................................. 10-10 
10.5. MSI – Module-internal Shared Input MSO – Module-internal Shared Output ................. 10-11 
10.5.1. MSI – Module-internal Shared Input ................................................................................. 10-12 
10.5.2. MSO – Module-internal Shared Output ............................................................................ 10-13 
10.6. Task Description: ET 200SP as Shared Device ............................................................... 10-14 
10.6.1. Exercise 1: Copying the S7-1510SP into a New Project .................................................. 10-15 
10.6.2. Exercise 2: Copying the ET 200SP into a New Project .................................................... 10-16 
10.6.3. Exercise 3: Parameterizing the ET 200SP as Module-by-Module Shared Device ........... 10-17 
10.6.4. Exercise 4: Controlling the Conveyor Model via the S7-1510SP ..................................... 10-18 
10.7. Additional Information ....................................................................................................... 10-19 
10.7.1. Shared Device in the Same Project .................................................................................. 10-20 
10.7.2. Requirements for Using Shared Device in the Same Project ........................................... 10-21 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10. Shared Device 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Shared Device Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... know the difference between a traditional system expansion and an 
alternative system expansion
... know the term Shared Device, understand it and be able 
to explain it
... be familiar with the different possibilities to configure and 
parameterize a Shared Device
... be able to commission a Shared Device
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-3 
10.1. Traditional System Expansion 
 
Traditional System Expansion 
In larger or widely distributed systems, numerous IO-Controllers as well as IO-Devices are 
frequently used. Often it happens that in time the system or even system parts must be 
expanded. For this, further IO-Devices are then used which are connected to new IO-Controllers. 
Even for expansions which are located very close together, such as, the installation of new 
sensors or actuators for a new IO-Controller, a new IO-Device must be installed in spite of an 
existing IO-Device. 
The reason for this is that an IO-Device in the traditional sense can always only be assigned to 
one IO-Controller. Therefore, the new sensor and actuator data must be coupled to a new IO-
Device which, for its part, is assigned to a new IO-Controller. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Traditional System Expansion
Control of the 
robot
System is 
expanded
System is 
expanded
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.2. Alternative System Expansion 
 
Alternative System Expansion with Shared Device 
For a system expansion which is located very close together, investment costs and time can be 
saved with the help of the functionality “Shared Device”. 
The “Shared Device” function makes it possible to distribute the modules as well as the 
submodules of an IO-Device between several IO-Controllers. The IO-Device is indirectly assigned 
to several IO-Controllers. Due to this functional principle, no new IO-Device must be installed for 
the system expansion but rather an expansion of the existing IO-Devices with further I/O modules 
is sufficient. The new data of the system is then assigned to a new IO-Controller. 
Note 
The “Shared Device” function also permits the mixing of F- as well as ‘normal’ modules in one 
and the same IO-Device. This IO-Device can then be accessed not only from an F-controller but 
also from a ‘normal’ controller. 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 4
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Alternative System Expansion
ET 200SP is 
Shared Device
ET 200SP HF up to 
4 Controllers
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-5 
10.3. Module-by-Module Shared Device 
 
Module-by-Module Shared Device 
The simplest and most widespread form of a Shared Device is the module-by-module Shared 
Device. To subdivide an IO-Device module-by-module means that the various IO-Controllers to 
which the IO-Device is to be assigned, in each case, have access to one complete module of this 
Device. It doesn’t matter what type of module this is as long as this module supports the “Shared 
Device” function. 
Conditions 
So that the “Shared Device” function can be used, some additional points must be taken into 
account: 
• The software with which the controller is programmed must support this function (Step7 as of 
V12 SP1). 
• The controller must support this function (S7-1500 as of V1.1 as IO-Controller). 
• The IO-Device must support this function (see device manual). 
• The IO-Controller(s) which is/are to use the Shared IO-Device must be created in different 
TIA Portal projects. 
• The Shared Device must be configured exactly the same in each of these projects. The 
exception to this is the configuration of the I/O modules. 
• The send clock (transmission frequency) of all IO-Controllers which have access to the 
Shared Device must be the same. 
Note 
All advanced functionalities such as “Submodule-by-submodule Shared Device” or module-
internal Shared Input as well as module-internal Shared Output are based on the principle of the 
“Shared Device”. That is, these functionalities always require that the IO-Controllers are located 
in different projects and that the IO-Device is identically configured as well as parameterized in 
the projects (exception: I/O-Module assignment). 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 6
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Module-by-Module Shared Device
The IO-Device must support the Shared Device function! Two projects are required!
Up to 4 controllers 
share the I/Os of the ET 
200SP
In this case, sharing 
is done module-by-
module
Copy & PasteThe same
IO-Device
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-6 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.3.1. Parameterizing the Module-by-Module Shared Device 
 
ParameterizationSo that the “Shared Device” function can be used, it is most important that the IO-Devices, which 
are used, support this functionality! If the IO-Device does, the entry “Shared Device” can be found 
under “Advanced options” under the PROFINET interface of the Device (see picture). Depending 
on the Interface module, up to 4 IO-Controllers are supported here. 
After you have parameterized how many IO-Controllers are to have access to the modules of the 
IO-Device, this must also be defined for the individual modules themselves. In the Device 
overview of the module, there is a column with the title “Access” (see picture). If the access to this 
module is not to be done by the local IO-Controller, but by one of the others, the correct setting 
must be chosen here. After all modules which are to be accessed by the local IO-Controller have 
been given the name of the local IO-Controller, the hardware configuration can be loaded into the 
local IO-Controller. 
Then, the projects with the other IO-Controllers are opened. The additional IO-Controllers that 
want to access the IO-Device as Shared Device must be located in a separate project! After that, 
the IO-Device is transferred from the original project into the other projects using Copy & Paste. 
Finally, the assignment of the I/O modules to the local IO-Controllers takes place. 
Note 
An I/O-Module may only be assigned to one IO-Controller! 
You have to perform this consistency check yourself. TIA Portal cannot check whether an I/O-
Module has been assigned to several IO-Controllers! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 7
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Parameterizing the 
Module-by-Module Shared Device
Selection
IO-Controller
Property Interface 
module
Controller in 
another project
Name of local 
IO-Controller
IO-Controller of 
another project
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-7 
Alternative Parameterization Methods 
The assignment of different IO-Controllers to the individual modules of the IO-Device can also be 
done in the Network view in TIA Portal. For this, the IO-Device must be highlighted and after that, 
the menu item “Shared Device” can be found in the "General" Properties under the entry “Module 
parameters”. The assignment can then be set here! 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-8 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.4. Submodule-by-Submodule Shared Device 
 
Submodule-by-Submodule Shared Device 
The functionality of the submodule-by-submodule Shared Device is the further development of 
the module-by-module Shared Device. Here, you can not only set whether you would like to 
assign individual modules to different IO-Controllers, but you can also decide submodule-by-
submodule which parts of the module are to be assigned to which IO-Controller! 
Into how many parts a module can be subdivided depends on the number of I/Os of the module: 
• One digital module with 16 inputs / outputs can be subdivided into 2 submodules. 
 
• One digital module with 32 inputs / outputs can be subdivided into 4 submodules. 
 
• One analog module with 8 inputs / outputs can be subdivided into 8 submodules. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 8
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Submodule-by-Submodule Shared Device
Up to 4 controllers 
share the I/Os of the 
ET 200MP
Sharing is done 
submodule-by-
submodule
The IO-Device and the modules must support submodule-by-submodule Shared Device!
Two projects are required!
Copy & PasteThe same
IO-Device
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-9 
• One analog module with 4 inputs / outputs can be subdivided into 4 submodules. 
 
• One analog module with 2 inputs / outputs can be subdivided into 2 submodules. 
 
• One analog module with 4 inputs and 2 outputs can be subdivided into 4 submodules with 1 
analog input each and into 2 submodules with 1 analog output each. 
 
 
That is, digital modules can only be subdivided into submodules with 8 inputs/outputs while 
analog modules can only be subdivided into submodules with 1 input/output. A larger, that is, 
other division of the submodules is currently not possible! 
Note 
A module which supports the functionality “module-by-module Shared Device” does not 
necessarily have to support the functionality “submodule-by-submodule Shared Device”. 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-10 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.4.1. Configuring the Submodule-by-Submodule Shared Device 
 
Configuration 
After defining the number of IO-Controllers assigned to the Shared Device, the submodules can 
be distributed. 
In the "Properties" of the I/O-Modules, under "Module parameters", you will find the section for 
configuring the inputs or the outputs, in which the possibility then exists to carry out the 
“Configuration of submodules”. Depending on the type, a different subdivision into the individual 
submodules occurs. 
Assignment of the I/O Addresses 
The addresses of the individual submodules are assigned according to the same principle which 
is also used for the I/O-Modules. The address area is filled starting from the smallest address 
upwards without leaving any possible gaps. As can be seen in the picture, this can mean that a 
DI 32 module which had the address area from 14..17 before the module distribution, all of a 
sudden occupies the addresses 4,14,15 as well as 16 after the subdivision to submodules. 
Note 
Currently, a module can either be subdivided into the predefined distribution or it is not 
subdivided. It is, for example, not possible to subdivide a digital input module with 32 inputs into 2 
submodules à 16 inputs. It can either be subdivided into 4 submodules à 8 inputs or not be 
subdivided at all! 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 9
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Configuring the
Submodule-by-Submodule Shared Device
Splitting the I/O 
addresses
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-11 
10.5. MSI – Module-internal Shared Input 
MSO – Module-internal Shared Output 
 
MSI - MSO 
If it is not sufficient that the inputs/outputs of a module are distributed amongst various IO-
Controllers, but all I/Os of a module are required on all Controllers, the functionality “module-
internal Shared Input” as well as “module-internal Shared Output” can be used. 
This function permits several IO-Controllers to access the same inputs or outputs. 
With this technique, up to 4 IO-Controllers can read-access the data of an input module or an 
output module. 
Note 
The functionality “MSI” as well as “MSO” cannot be used in conjunction with the function 
“submodule-by-submodule Shared Device”. If one of these two functions is used in the module, 
the respective other function is automatically deactivated and cannot be used! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 10
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
MSI – Module-internal Shared Input
MSO – Module-internal Shared Output
The IO-Device and the modules must support MSI or MSO! 
Two projects are required!
In MSO,
only 1 Controller can 
write outputs
Up to 4 Controllers 
can read back 
outputs
Up to 4 Controllers 
can read inputs
Copy & PasteThe same
IO-Device
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-12 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.5.1. MSI – Module-internal Shared Input 
 
MSI – Module-internal Shared Input 
The functionality “module-internal Shared Input” (MSI) enables an input module to provide its 
input data to up to four IO-Controllers. Each Controller can read-access the same channels. 
Configuration 
When the module supportsthe “MSI” function, a section “Copy of module for Shared Device 
(MSI)” can be found in the ‘Module parameters’ in the ‘Properties’ of the module. Here you can 
define for how many IO-Controllers the input is to be duplicated. Then, which copy is to be 
accessed locally and which copies are available for the other IO-Controllers in other projects is 
also defined via the column “Access”. 
Note 
If the “MSI” function is activated in the module, the functionality “Value status (Quality 
Information)” is also automatically activated. This supplies a Quality Byte along with every byte 
which specifies the state of this byte. 
Due to this automatic setting, the address space which is required for this module, is however, 
also doubled! (example picture: 4Byte → 8Byte) 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 11
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
MSI – Module-internal Shared Input
Value status 
expands I/Os
I-Addresses are added
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-13 
10.5.2. MSO – Module-internal Shared Output 
 
MSO – Module-internal Shared Output 
The function “module-internal Shared Output” (MSO) enables an output module to provide its 
output data to up to four IO-Controllers. With this function you must make sure, however, that still 
only 1 IO-Controller has the write permission, that is, the write-access rights for this output 
module. All other IO-Controllers are only granted a read-only access to this data. 
Configuration 
Just as for the function “MSI”, the module must support the functionality “MSO”. If this is the case, 
then a section “Copy of module for shared device (MSO)” can be found in the ‘Module 
parameters’ in the ‘Properties’ of the module. Here you can define for how many IO-Controllers 
the output is to be duplicated. However as mentioned, only a copy of the module output state as 
input address occurs here! For the IO-Controller which has the write-access to the output data, 
the system additionally stores a copy of the output data in the input data. Finally, which copy is to 
be accessed locally and which copies are available for the other IO-Controllers in other projects is 
also defined via the column “Access”. 
Note 
If the “MSO” function is activated in the module, the functionality “Value status (Quality 
Information)” is also automatically activated. This supplies a Quality Byte along with every byte 
which specifies the state of this byte. 
Due to this automatic setting, the address space which is required for this module, is however, 
also doubled! (example picture: 4Byte → 8Byte) 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 12
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
MSO – Module-internal Shared Output
Value status 
expands I/Os
I-Addresses are added
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-14 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.6. Task Description: ET 200SP as Shared Device 
 
Task Description 
The ET 200SP is now to be used as a Shared Device between the S7-1513 and the S7-1510SP. 
The digital output card of the ET 200SP is to be assigned to the S7-1510SP and the remaining 
modules, including the header module, are to be assigned as IO-Controllers to the S7-1513. 
For this functionality, you must generate a new TIA Portal project in which one after the other the 
S7-1510SP and then the ET 200SP are copied. Then, in both projects, you are to parameterize 
the ET 200SP as Shared Device and assign the input and output cards to the correct IO-
Controller. 
Finally, the control of the conveyor model via the S7-1510SP is to be made with a simple jog 
operation. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 13
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Task Description: Integrating the S7-1510 and 
Defining the ET 200SP as Shared Device
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-15 
10.6.1. Exercise 1: Copying the S7-1510SP into a New Project 
 
Task 
You are to create a new TIA Portal project “IK-TIAPN_en_Shared_Device” and copy the 
S7-1510SP into this project. 
What to Do 
1. Open a new TIA Portal Instance. 
2. Create a new project. Name it IK-TIAPN_en_Shared_Device. 
3. Using drag & drop, copy the S7-1510SP into it. 
4. Save your new project. 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 14
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Exercise 1: 
Copying the S7-1510SP into a New Project
Create new project
Copy & Paste
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-16 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.6.2. Exercise 2: Copying the ET 200SP into a New Project 
 
Task 
You are to copy the ET 200SP into your new project. 
What to Do 
1. Copy the ET 200SP into your new project. 
2. Create a folder called "Shared" in the project "IK-TIAPN_en_Shared_Device". After that, drag 
the S7-1510 and the copied ET 200SP into this folder. 
3. Save it. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 15
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Exercise 2 : 
Copying the ET 200SP into a New Project
Copy & Paste
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-17 
10.6.3. Exercise 3: Parameterizing the ET 200SP as Module-by-Module Shared 
Device 
 
Task 
You are to parameterize the ET 200SP in both projects in such a way that it takes on the function 
of a module-by-module Shared Device. The "DQ 16x24VDC/0.5A ST_1" module is to be 
assigned to the S7-1510SP. 
What to Do 
1. Open the Device view of the ET 200SP in your original project. 
2. Parameterize the ET 200SP as Shared Device (the parameterization in the picture 
corresponds to the ET 200SP parameterization which is connected to the S7-1513). 
3. Open the Device view of the ET 200SP in the “IK-TIAPN_en_Shared_Device” project. 
4. Complete the parameterization of the ET 200SP as Shared Device. 
5. Compile your projects and save them. 
6. Download your projects into the two controllers and check whether all devices function without 
error. 
Note 
Don’t forget your MRP parameterization in the new “IK-TIAPN_en_Shared_Device” project! 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 16
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Exercise 3: Parameterizing the ET 200SP 
as Module-by-Module Shared Device
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-18 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.6.4. Exercise 4: Controlling the Conveyor Model via the S7-1510SP 
 
Task 
You are to program the control of the conveyor model with the help of the S7-1510SP. A simple 
jog operation is to be possible. The input “S_ConveyorLeft_Man” (%I 0.0) is to control the output 
“K_Left” (%Q4.6) and the input “S_ConveyorRight_Man” (%I 0.1) the output “K_Right” (%Q4.5). 
The jog operation is to be programmed in the OB “Main” of the S7-1510SP. The tag tables for the 
tags of the conveyor model and the S7-1510 case can be copied from the library. The new input 
tags “S_ConveyorLeft_Man” and “S_ConveyorRight_Man” are located in the tag table 
“1510CaseVariables”. 
What to Do 
1. Copy the tag tables from the library. 
2. In OB1, program the required functionality as per the task. 
3. Compile and download your project. 
4. Test whether the program fulfills the task. 
5. Save your project. 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 17
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Exercise 4: 
Controlling the Conveyor Model via the S7-1510SP
Programming Jog left/right 
in the OB Main 
Jog left
S_ConveyorLeft_Man
Jog right
S_ConveyorRight_Man
neue Variablentabellen per 
Drag & Drop anlegen
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-19 
10.7. Additional Information 
 
Note 
The following pages contain either additional information or are for reference to completea topic. 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / Ringredundanz MRP Seite 19 Siemens AG © 2016
Wenn Sie noch mehr wissen wollen
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
10-20 Training Document, V15.01.00 
10.7.1. Shared Device in the Same Project 
 
Using a Shared Device in the Same Project 
For easier management of the Shared Device functionality, it is also possible to use this function 
in a project in TIA Portal. 
This can make the maintenance and service of the IO-Device easier. It should, however, be 
transparent, that the two IO-Devices are one and the same IO-Device, that is, that the IO-Device 
uses the functionality Shared Device! 
 
Note 
Here as well, it is required that the Shared Device Copy must match the original IO-Device 
exactly! 
Furthermore, the Shared Device and the Shared Device Copy cannot be operated in the same 
subnet. TIA Portal would detect a double IP address here and would output an error message! 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 19
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Shared Device in the Same Project
The same IO-Device
Copy & Paste
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – Shared Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 10-21 
10.7.2. Requirements for Using Shared Device in the Same Project 
 
Requirements 
The functionality “Generate PROFINET device name automatically” is a convenience function in 
TIA Portal. This derives the PROFINET device name automatically from the Device-Name. In that 
way, the assignment of an online IO-Device to an offline IO-Device in a project is considerably 
simplified. 
So that you can now use the functionality ‘Shared Device’ in the same project, the option 
“Generate PROFINET device name automatically” must be deactivated for the Shared Device. 
Only by deactivating this function is it possible for the copy of the IO-Device, which is to be used 
as a Shared Device, to be assigned the same device name offline. 
In TIA-Portal, you can have two identical PROFINET device names but not two identical Device-
Names! 
 
Note 
The manually set name of the copied IO-Device must match the name of the IO-Device, which 
served as the template, exactly. 
Changes to the name of the original IO-Device later on must be added manually! 
 
 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 20
IK-TIAPN
Shared Device
Requirements for Using Shared Device in the Same 
Project
Two identical Device names 
not possible
Deactivate option before 
copying
The name of the copied IO-
Device 
is adopted
Must have the same IP 
address → different 
networks
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – I-Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 11-1 
 
Contents 11 
 
 
 
 
 
11. I-Device – Intelligent IO-Device ........................................................................... 11-2 
11.1. Data Exchange between Two IO-Controllers ..................................................................... 11-3 
11.2. I-Device ............................................................................................................................... 11-4 
11.2.1. I-Device without Subordinate PROFINET IO-System......................................................... 11-5 
11.2.2. I-Device with Subordinate PROFINET IO-System .............................................................. 11-6 
11.2.3. I-Device as Shared Device ................................................................................................. 11-7 
11.3. Communication via Transfer Areas..................................................................................... 11-8 
11.4. Parameterizing the I-Device ................................................................................................ 11-9 
11.5. Parameterizing the Transfer Area ..................................................................................... 11-10 
11.6. Cross-Project I-Device ...................................................................................................... 11-11 
11.6.1. Importing the I-Device in a New Project ........................................................................... 11-12 
11.7. Task Description: S7-1510SP as I-Device ........................................................................ 11-13 
11.7.1. Exercise 1: Parameterizing the S7-1510SP as I-Device .................................................. 11-14 
11.7.2. Exercise 2: Integrating the I-Device in the S7-1513 Project ............................................. 11-15 
11.7.3. Exercise 3: Controlling the Conveyor Model with the Help of the S7-1513 as well as 
the S7-1510SP .................................................................................................................. 11-16 
 
 
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – I-Device 
11-2 Training Document, V15.01.00 
11. I-Device – Intelligent IO-Device 
 
 
SITRAIN
IK-TIAPN / I-Device Page 2 Siemens AG © 2016
Objectives
At the end of the chapter the participant will ...
... understand the IO-Controller communication with PROFINET
... be familiar with the possible applications of an I-Device
... be able to configure and parameterize an IO-Controller as I-Device 
... be able to commission an I-Device
Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
IK-TIAPN – I-Device 
Training Document, V15.01.00 11-3 
11.1. Data Exchange between Two IO-Controllers 
 
Data Exchange between Two IO-Controllers 
If data is to be exchanged between two controllers, the first possible solution that comes to mind 
is the CPU-CPU communication using the communication instructions in TIA Portal. These 
include, for example, the popular S7 Communication and the Open User Communication (in 
short: OUC). It is also possible to use the MODBUS on TCP Communication for the CPU-CPU 
communication. Familiar instructions of these communication methods are: 
• GET / PUT 
• BSEND / BRCV 
• TSEND / TRCV 
However, in addition to these more familiar communication methods, data exchange between two 
controllers can also be accomplished by using a data exchange functionality offered in 
PROFINET: the option "I-Device" (Intelligent IO-Device). 
Note 
Not every controller / IO-Controller supports the functionality I-Device! 
 
SITRAIN © Siemens AG 2018
Page 3
IK-TIAPN
I-Device
Data Exchange between Two IO-Controllers
How can data 
exchange be 
accomplished?
Data exchange
I/O data of ET is 
to be transferred to 
HMI
 Industrial Communication, PROFINET with Industrial Ethernet in the TIA Portal 
 IK-TIAPN – I-Device 
11-4 Training Document, V15.01.00 
11.2. I-Device 
 
Device (Intelligent IO-Device) 
In a controller, the functionality "I-Device" makes it possible to exchange data between different 
IO-Controllers. That way, the controller can, for example, be used as an intelligent pre-processing 
unit for partial tasks. In this case, the controller / the IO-Controller with activated I-Device 
functionality is connected to a "higher-level" IO-Controller as an IO-Device. 
Data exchange using the I-Device functionality has the following advantages: 
• Easy interfacing of IO-Controllers 
• Real-time communication between IO-Controllers (Real-Time as well as Isochronous Real- 
Time) 
• Less processing load on the IO-Controller due to distribution of processing power amongst I-
Devices 
• Lower communication load due to processing of process data on-site 
• Clarity, since partial tasks are processed in separate STEP-7 projects 
Ways to Integrate an I-Device 
The integration of an I-Device in the PROFINET IO-System can be done in the following ways: 
• I-Device without subordinate PROFINET IO-System 
• I-Device with subordinate PROFINET IO-System 
• I-Device as Shared Device 
Note 
On the Service & Support pages, under the Entry-ID: 109478798 you will find further